Home

Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites--A Methods

1. 6y eueidoseu 1299935 gt A ue NOILISOd 5 409 ZSI 0 0 8 85 6 0 pos 42988035 Q O 48 L wu 92 7 A I 8 5 1 1 9 queon sug13 91 017 48 1 1 82 98 ye Section 3 4 Revision 0 Page 1 of 7 3 4 GROUNDWATER Groundwater sampling suffers from many of the same difficulties as closed containers such as the inability to observe what is being collected or what disturbances are resulting from that collection There are essentially two sources from which to collect groundwater either from wells or from seeps and springs The former is more complex and a discussion of its intricacies will follow later The sampling of seeps and springs is considerably easier but it may be less indicative of the actual groundwater quality than well sampling Seeps and springs are generally areas where the surface contour intersects the water table These areas usually have well established microbiological populations evidenced by extensive moss and algal growths These microbiological populations usually extend for some distance into the water bearing formation aquifer and are generally more populous and of different species than those associated with the bulk of the aquifer Their effect on the oxygen content pH nutrient and metals concentrations in the groundwater can be extensive The water therefore that seeps from these
2. pue OE uoj32e43xo ded 1243 4 0001 2 9 1009 3 9 231504102 40 919932 43 3 21640 gt Hd 03 0001 skep 82 YoseH 2 002 9 25215 110 2 Hd 03 os sunoy gp voseH 9 1002 9 d 93 s0dwmo2 40 9949 2 Hd 001 ge POSH 2 1009 9 d 231504202 40 339431N 2 Hd 03 934231N 001 82 voseH 9 1009 9 d 231506402 snid 2939434N gt Hd 12303 00S sKep 82 os H 2 1009 9 4 93 50dw02 4249 Luepaty 2 Hd o 00 sAep 82 Posen 2 1009 9 d 231506805 4249 e UOwEy u3b0431N 82 6 001 ideoxe sujuow 9 gt 9 4 33 s0dw02 40 4949 230 skep 82 002 3daoxa syquom 9 231540 493114 9 d 231506805 papuadsns sAep 82 5H Z gt Hd 03 002 3daoxa syjuom 9 EONH 23 5 0 433144 9 4 231506102 Paalossig 42 3622 3 51939 00S 3UjN 12390 9 d qeay 001 sanoy pz J 1002 9 d 33 50dw02 40 4249 ee So 92413 40324425244 19 02 enbuu2o3 4939ut404 oun LOA 01339 L09 nbaa unu WSEERBEBRSEEZEZSEEEEZEEEEEEENEEXSEELSERSIELIZSEZEEBEEEZERRIEISENEZEXE SEZEESEUEZIESEZENEEBENEZEE LEEEEEEZEERNXZESEZIEXEEEEREEDEREER 3 05 3181 0 15101 Appendix A Page 51 o
3. 293 J839u 4e d oun OA 12 02 ji WEZEBEZEEHSSEEEZEZEEXEEREREXEZEZELZZEZZZZEEEEZEEZXEZEEZEEIXXILIZEEXIEZEEEZEEZEZZZZEZEESEZZRENEEEKEZEEEEEEZEZXEEIEXEZEENXEXEZEENRKEEEREERE 3 05 T Y 318Vl 52 Appendix B Revision 0 Page 1 of 12 APPENDIX B EQUIPMENT AVAILABILITY AND FABRICATION 8 1 Appendix B Revision 0 Page 2 of 12 EQUIPMENT AVAILABILITY Apparatus e Stainless Steel Scoops Trays Beakers Ladles 8 9 15 e Thin Wall Tube Samplers Soil Augers Hand Corers 45 50 e Gravity Corers Dredges and Grabs 40 45 e Thiefs and Triers 9 34 Water Level Indicators 38 45 e Down Hole Submersible Probes 23 25 43 51 e Bailers Coliwasa 26 34 48 e Peristaltic Pumps 8 9 15 29 e Gas Displacement Pumps 5 48 e Combustible Gas Detectors 3 13 16 17 33 36 41 e Oxygen Monitors 6 13 16 17 33 36 41 e Portable Flame lonization Detectors 1 2 e Portable Photoionization Detectors 22 31 e Stain Detector Tubes 7 17 31 33 35 e Personal Sampling Pumps 7 11 14 19 28 32 33 39 46 e High Volume Air Samplers 18 39 44 1 Appendix B Revision 0 Page 3 of 12 e Radiation Dosi meters 4 10 20 47 49 e Radiation Film Badges 12 20 24 42 e Radiation Survey Instruments 4 10 12 20 21 27 30 47 49 Vendors Analabs Inc 80 Republic Drive North Haven CT 06473 203 288 8463 Analytical Instrument Development Inc Rt 4
4. ST T T T 242439040 42141 v 2 L ULA ST AULA 9 18 9L E43 Luo Addy bbl 9pt40 U aua Ayre 9 0 93e322V L u19N 9 21 0143 33 1 92 4014 aua_ 9 21 4 33 9 12 9 21 ETT 0944 8 61 9pt40 u AULA 9 21 0 81 LoLyqaueyy 3 9 21 U P p AULA 0 8 ST EIT u0844 spuooes punodwo spuodses 9 07 3 0 M 830SVWOuH2 NO 31VivHlHd 1A23Q0SIIG 1N32u3d HONI 8 S3WIL 11 3138 03193135 3789 4 24 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 9 of 14 penu13u02 0 0001 9utp LAKd 0 000T Ang 8 9I jouequag 0 0001 O LIT 35 0 0001 9utpta d 0 801 Ang L LL9 9494 35 9 u zu g 4433 669 auazueg 4433 65 apiuo4qiQg euaLAu33 7 022 1 33 0 vS 2 1 1 eueu38040 u214 Z ETE Z T T eueu3o040 U21J1 Z Et gua yZ O4O 14524391 1 8 2 LA3nqos LAu389W 9 6 9u03953 LA3nqoS LKui9W L 28t N iouedouq L 8 itouedoug 0 1 1 3 0 40 LYILUZ L U L euanLo 2 I 01 0 12 3 1 1 8 001 LAY EW 1 92 aye L VY 14433 7 96 442 4433 b 2 LUZIO 42141 9 900393 Auda LAUIEW G 22 19 6 9 dus LAu38040 4214 9 12 auazueg 9 99 40 4714
5. 5 Remove from corer and slide sample out of corer into stainless steel or Teflon 6 Transfer sample into appropriate sample bottle with stainless steel lab spoon or equivalent 7 Check that a Teflon liner is present in cap if required Secure the cap tightly The chemical preservation of solids is generally not recommended Refrigeration is usually the best approach supplemented by a minimal holding time Refer to Appendix A for sample containerization and preservation guidelines 2 12 Section 2 3 3 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 STABILIZING FINS NOSE PIECE Figure 2 3 Gravity 5 2 13 Sources Section 2 3 3 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Label the sample bottle with the appropriate sample tag sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Complete all chain of custody documents and record in the field logbook Consult Appendix for decontamination requirements and decontami nate sampling equipment after use and between sampling locations American Public Health Association Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 14th Edition Washington D C 1975 2 14 Section 2 3 4 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 2 3 4 METHOD 11 6 SAMPLING BOTTOM SLUDGES OR SEDIMENTS WITH A PONAR GRAB Discussion The Ponar grab is a clamshell type scoop activated by a counter lever system The shell is opened and latched in place
6. Avoid contacting the sample with oxidizing agents which may diminish the hydrazine content Appendix A Revision 0 Page 20 of 52 lodide Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass containers Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Store samples at 4 C analyze within 24 hours of collection Quality Control No special precautions Appendix A Revision 0 Page 21 of 52 lodi ne Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass containers Sample Collection Preservation and Handling The samples must be analyzed onsite or brought immediately to the laboratory The maximum holding time is 2 hours Quality Control lodine determinations must begin immediately after sampling Appendix A Revision 0 Page 22 of 52 Metals Except Chromium VI Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Nitric acid 1 1 Mix equal volumes of conc nitric acid HNO3 ACS with deionized water Deionized water Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Wash and rinse sample container thoroughly with 1 1 nitric acid then with deionized water before use Acidify the sample with 1 1 nitric acid to a pH of 2 0 or less Normally 3 ml of 1 1 nitric acid per liter should be sufficient to preserve the samples This will keep the metals in solution and minimize their adsorption on the container wall All samples should be analyzed within 6 months of collection An exc
7. Sources GCA Corporation Quality Assurance Plan Love Canal Study Appendix A Sampling Procedures EPA Contract 68 02 3168 GCA Corporation Guidelines for Air Monitoring at Hazardous Waste Sites for Volatile and Semivolatile Organic Compounds Using Tenax and Polyurethane Foam Sorbents EPA Contract 68 02 3168 April 1983 Section 4 2 8 Revision 0 Page 1 of 7 4 2 8 METHOD 1V 8 COLLECTING SEMI VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT AIR USING POLYURETHANE FOAM LOW VOLUME SAMPLERS Description Polyurethane foam PUF has been shown to be an excellent collection media for trapping and concentrating a variety of semi volatile organic compounds defined here as exhibiting a vapor pressure less than or equal to 1 mm Hg at 20 C Foams plugs are cut from the type of PUF used for furniture upholstery pillows and mattresses and is Soxhlet extracted with high grade hexane pesticide quality or equivalent prior to being fitted into specialized sampling cartridges To sample airborne organics a known volume of air is drawn through the collection media Cylindrical polyurethane foam plugs polyether type 0 021 gm cm are cut from 3 inch stock using a 25 mm circular template then cleaned in a soxhlet extractor to remove potential interferences After drying to remove excess solvent and analyzing of one plug from each batch to verify freedom from contamination the plugs are placed under slight compression in 22 mm inside diam
8. gt 9uj4O U2 JO aduasaud au3 pasn aq uo pinouSp o w Ji U1 045 91 42324 319140 03 opj4O Q2 JO 5 1 2 2 LW 1 ppe sanou gy uju3 A 1 4 30uue2 10 JIJ wu gt S0 28 009 Y43 Sos 2412540 20 pue 90 28 9 009 Vd3 1 pue 43384 30 SjsA PUy 03 Suojjjppy 1952 4591 uj PAIS 25043 Fiq auaAdosdh10g 044 55019 9 auaLAu39 0d de 001 SANOY 3 7 1009 9 4 931506002 4949 de gt 9313 15 wnjpos W T O pau 001 1 T ppe 3 1009 9 931506805 40 X01 2 de 92 sKep 03 2 7 1009 u0 j3 9 33 50dw02 4249 301 0S2 s4nou gy 3 9 1009 9 d 931504802 qeJ9 530032032 05 on 931500 3uju439390 9 d 931506405 4249 314115 6 lt Hd Sh d 2393 2 009 skep 2 2 7 1009 9 d 93 50dw02 40 4249 05 82 2 1009 9 d 93 s0dw02 qeug 32 LAS oot 5 ge 3 7 1003 9 d 231506802 4249 9198913395 001 sfep 1003 9 d 91 s50dwo2 4849 9301 32 0 001 skep J 1009 9 d 231504802 40 qe49 19301 papuadsns 001 sep 4 39 1002 9 d 931500805 49 49 9113 LOA 3009 Spy Los a es ee ee q9ui3 394425244 pU 2 0
9. 0 A ASSEMBLY wu TUBING NUT B BOLT GASKET ROTAMETER BACKING v CONDENSER AND CLIP Source Reference 37 Figure 4 5 Exploded view of typical high volume air sampler parts Source Reference 37 Figure 4 6 Assembled sampler and shelter 4 56 Section 4 2 9 Revision 0 Page 3 of 6 Procedure for Use 1 Calibration Refer to 40 CFR 50 Appendix B Part 8 0 Calibration as amended and the EPA Proposed Changes to Ambient Measurement Methodology for Carbon Monoxide Particulate Sulfur Dioxide 47 FR 2341 January 15 1982 35 Essentially samplers must be calibrated when first purchased after major maintenance on the sampler e g replacement of motor or brushes any time the flow measuring device rotameter or recorder has been replaced or repaired or any time a one point calibration check deviates from the calibration curve by more than 6 percent The following procedure is based on the use of a certified variable resistance orifice as the sampler calibration device and a continuous flow rate recorder Dickson recorder used to ensure the accuracy of air volume measurements Samplers may also be equipped with an electronic flow controlling mechanism to perform the same function Flow rate controllers and recorders are not as yet required however errors resulting from nonconstant flow rates can be greatly reduced by using such devices In addition the currently a
10. Unstable samples should be tested without delay Appendix A Revision 0 Page 14 of 52 Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Store samples at 4 C All samples must be analyzed within 48 hours of collection Quality Control No special precautions Appendix A Revision 0 Page 15 of 52 Conductance Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Store samples at 4 C All samples must be analyzed within 28 days Quality Control No special precautions Appendix A Revision 0 Page 16 of 52 Cyanide Total and Amenable to Chlorination Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sodium hydroxide solution 465 Ascorbic acid Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Because most cyanides are highly reactive and unstable analyze samples as soon as possible preserve the sample by addition of of 10 N NaOH to raise the pH of the sample to 12 or above and store in a closed dark bottle at 4 C If residual chlorine is present in the sample add 0 6 g ascorbic aci d All samples should be analyzed within 14 days of collection Quality Control Maximum holding time is 24 hours when sulfide is present Optionally all samples may be tested with lead acetate paper before the pH adjustment in order to determine if sulfide is present
11. 513 941 2229 Gilian Instrument Corp 1275 Route 23 Wayne NJ 07470 201 696 9244 B 4 Appendix B Revision 0 Page 4 of 12 20 23 24 26 20 29 Appendix B Revision 0 Page 5 of 12 Gulf Nuclear 202 Medical Center Boulevard Webster TX 77598 713 332 3581 Health Physics Instruments 124 San Felicia Drive Goleta CA 93117 805 685 2612 Systems Inc 30 Ossipee Road Newton Upper Falls MA 02164 617 964 6690 Hydrolab Corporation P 0 Box 9406 Austin TX 78766 512 255 8841 ICN Dosimetry Service 26201 Niles Road Cleveland OH 44128 216 831 3000 Industrial and Environmental Analysts Inc P 0 Box 626 Essex Junction VT 05452 802 878 5138 Johnson Division Inc St Paul MN 55164 612 636 3900 Johnston Laboratories P 0 Box 20086 383 Hillen Road Towson MD 21204 301 337 8700 Kurz Instruments Inc P 0 Box 849 Carmel Valley CA 93924 408 659 3421 Leonard Mold and Die 960 West 48th Avenue Denver CO 80221 303 433 7101 B 5 30 31 32 34 35 36 315 38 39 Ludlum Measurements P 0 Box 248 Sweetwater TX 79556 915 235 5494 Matheson Safety Products P 0 Box 85 932 Paterson Plank Road East Rutherford NJ 07073 201 933 2400 MDA Scientific Inc 1815 Elmdale Ave Glenview IL 60025 Mine Safety Appliance Co 600 Penn Center Boulevard Pittsburgh PA 15235 Nasco 901 Janesville Ave Fort
12. A shipping order bill of lading manifest or other shipping document serving a similar purpose and containing the information required by 172 202 172 203 and 172 204 2 DOT HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANIFEST REQUIREMENTS 5172 205 person may offer transport transfer or deliver a hazardous waste unless a hazardous waste manifest is prepared signed carried and given as required of that person by 172 205 B The shipper generator must prepare the manifest in accordance with the EPA Regulations CFR Title 40 Part 262 C The original copy of the manifest must be dated by and bear the handwritten signa i of the person representing the shipper generator of waste at the time it is offered for transportation and Initial carrier accepting the waste for transportation D copy of the manifest must dated by and bear the handwritten signature of the person representing 1 Each subsequent carrier accepting the waste for transportation at the time of acceptance and 2 The designated facility receiving the waste upon receipt 17 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 18 of 23 opy of the manifest bearing all required dates and signatures must he Given to a person representing each carrier accepting the waste for transportation Carried during transportation in the same manner as required for shipping papers Given to a person representing the facility receiving the waste Returned to the shipper generator by the carrier that t
13. Fd States vironmental Monitoring Systems EPA 600 4 84 076 nme ntal Pr otectio La abor ory December 1984 Rud Las Ve egas NV 89114 Research and Development SEPA Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites A Methods Manual Volume Available Sampling Methods second Edition EPA 600 4 84 076 December 1984 CHARACTERIZATION OF HAZARDOUS WASTE SITES A METHODS MANUAL VOLUME 11 AVAILABLE SAMPLING METHODS Second Edition by Patrick J Ford Paul J Turina Douglas Seely GCA CORPORATION GCA TECHNOLOGY DIVISION Bedford Massachusetts 01730 Prepared for Lockheed Engineering and Management Services Company Inc Las Vegas Nevada 89109 Under EPA Contract No 68 03 3050 EPA Project Officer Charles Fitzsimmons Advanced Monitoring Systems Division Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory Las Vegas Nevada 89114 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT U S ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY LAS VEGAS NEVADA 89114 NOTICE The information in this document has been funded wholly or in part by the United States Environmental Protection Agency under contract to Lockheed Engineering and Management Services Company Inc to GCA Corporation Technology Division It has been subject peer and administrative review and it has been approved for number 68 03 3050 and subcontract to the Agency s publication The contents reflect the views and polic
14. Sampling for Organic Chemicals and Microorganisms in the Subsurface EPA 600 2 77 176 August 1977 Section 3 4 5 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 3 4 5 METHOD 111 11 SAMPLING MONITOR WELLS WITH A SUBMERSIBLE PUMP Discussion Several types of submersible pumps are available for groundwater monitoring and offer considerable advantages over other systems They are able to operate from depths beyond the capabilities of peristaltic pumps and save significant time and effort relative to hand bailing Further if constructed of suitable materials and properly used they can both purge and adequately sample the well Uses Submersible pumps generally use one of two types of power supplies either electric or compressed gas Electric powered pumps generally run off a 12 VDC rechargeable battery from an automotive electrical system Those units powered by compressed gas normally use a small electric compressor which also needs 12 VDC power They may also utilize compressed gas from bottles or even high performance hand pumps These pumps are generally constructed of more or less noncontami nating materials suitable for Priority Pollutant Sampling They often contain plastics rubber or metal parts which may contribute or otherwise effect the analysis of samples for certain trace components Investigations requiring samples for a wide range of trace analysis may preclude their use for sample acquisition however they may still be useful for pur
15. The grain thief Figure 2 6 consists of two slotted telescoping tubes usually made of brass or stainless steel The outer tube has a conical pointed tip on one end that permits the sampler to penetrate the material being sampled The sampler is opened and closed by rotating the inner tube Grain thiefs are generally 61 to 100 cm long by 1 27 to 2 54 cm in diameter and they are commercially available at laboratory supply houses Uses The grain thief is used for sampling powdered or granular wastes or materials in bags fiberdrums sacks or similar containers This sampler is most useful when the solids are no greater than 0 6 cm in diameter Procedures for Use 1 While the precleaned sampler is in the closed position insert it into the granular or powdered material or waste being sampled from a point near a top edge or corner through the center and to a point diagonally opposite the point of entry 2 Rotate the inner tube of the sampler into the open position 3 Wiggle the sampler few times to allow materials to enter the open slots 4 Place the sampler in the closed position and withdraw from the material being sampled 5 Place the sampler in a horizontal position with the slots facing upward 6 Rotate and slide away the outer tube from the inner tube 1 Transfer the collected sample in the inner tube into a suitable sample container If composite sampling is desired collect two or more core samples at diffe
16. or solid is identified Then the name of the specific material is listed before the category for example Acetone Flammable Liquid followed by its appropriate UN number found in the DOT hazardous materials table 172 101 Place the following DOT labels if applicable on outside of can or bottle e Flammable Liquid or Flammable Solid Dangerous When Wet Must be used with Flammable Solid label if material meets the definition of a water reactive material e Cargo Aircraft Only Must be used if net quantity of sample in each outer container is greater than 1 quart for Flammable Liquid n 0o s 25 pounds for Flammable Solid n o s Place all information on outside shipping container as on can or bottle specifically C7 Appendix C Revision 0 page 8 of 23 Proper shipping 8 UN or NA number Proper label s e Addressee and addressor Note that the previous two steps 2 and 3 are EPA recommendations Step 4 is a DOT requirement 5 Print Laboratory Samples and This End Up or This Side Up clearly on top of shipping container Put upward pointing arrows on all four sides of container Shipping Papers 1 Use abbreviations only where specified Complete carrier provided bill of lading and sign certification Statement if carrier does not provide use standard industry form Provide the following information in the order listed One form may be used for more than one
17. Appendix A Revision 0 Page 11 of 52 Chlorine Demand Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Testing apparatus and reagents if analysis is to be performed onsite Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Chlorine in aqueous solution is unstable and the chlorine content of samples or solutions particularly weak solutions will decrease rapidly Exposure to sunlight or other strong light or agitation will accelerate the reduction of chlorine Therefore sample must be analyzed onsite or brought immediately to the laboratory The maximum holding time is 2 hours Quality Control Chlorine determinations must begin immediately after sampling Excessive light and agitation should be avoided Appendix A Revision 0 Page 12 of 52 Chromium VI Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Store samples at 4 C All samples must be analyzed within 24 hours of collection Do not contact sample with acid Appendix A Revision 0 Page 13 of 52 Chemical Oxygen Demand COD Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Cone sulfuric acid 50 5 Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Preserve the sample by acidification with cone sulfuric acid to a pH less than 2 Store samples at 4 C All samples must be analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control
18. DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATI ON GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 172 300 172 304 All containers of hazardous materials i e packages freight containers or transport vehicles must unless specifically exempted be marked with the proper shipping name s of the contents and the name and address or either the consignee or consignor All markings must be Antimony Chloride Solid 1 Durable in English and printed on or affixed to the surface of the package or on a label tag or sign To Johnson Products Co 1420 Main St 2 On a background of a sharply contrasting Armstrong 52650 color and unobscured by labels or attach ments 3 Away from other markings that could reduce its effectiveness LIQUIDS INSIDE CONTAINERS 8172 312 1 Inside containers must be packed with ve Laud N O S closures in the upright position M 2 Must be marked on the outside with THIS END UP or THIS SIDE UP 3 Arrows must be used only to show orienta tion of package An arrow symbol indicated by ANSI Standard 11968 THIS WAY UP Pictorial arrows of goods is recommended Appendix C Revision 0 Page 21 of 23 EXPORT BY WATER 172 302 All n o s entries when authorized in 5172 101 or 172 102 must have the technical name s of the material immediately following the proper shipping name for export by water For mixtures two more hazardous materials the technical Johnson Produ
19. Description of screen welded galvanized steel 1 0 of screen section 822 64 86 5 Elevation depth of bottom of screen NNUS 64 5 Elev depth of bottom of gravel pack Elev depth of bottom of plugged blank section 822 64 86 5 of filler below plugged section 822 64 86 5 Elevation of bottom of borehole Form 1002 Figure 3 6 Sample well construction form 3 26 Section 3 4 Revision 0 Page 3 of 7 however that the actual well depth may be somewhat less than the completion depth listed on the log as a result of aquifer invasion through the screen or open hole sloughing below the casing This may be particularly noticable in wells that have had only sporadic use or have been idle long It is recommended then that actual well depth be checked by field measurement whenever possible Measurement of the well depth can be accomplished by sounding the wel with a reusable weight attached to a disposable line Slowly lower the weight into the well until the bottom is detected Wth the line taut mark the top of casing level on the line with waterproof ink Recover the line and weight from the well and accurately measure the length of line below the mark Discard the line and thoroughly clean the weight before reuse Next measure the casing length above or below ground level and subtract or add to obtain well depth When measuring potentially contaminated wells wear appropriate safety gear to av
20. If sulfide is present it can be removed by the addition of cadmium nitrate powder until a negative spot test is obtained The sample is filtered and then NaOH is added to pH 12 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 17 of 52 Fluoride Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Polyethylene bottles are required for collecting and storing samples for fluoride analysis Always rinse the bottle with a portion of the sample All samples must be analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control No special precautions Appendix A Revision 0 Page 18 of 52 Hardness Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Acidify with HNO3 to pH 2 store samples at 4 C Samples should be analyzed within 6 months of collection Quality Control Serious errors may be introduced during sampling and storage by failure to remove residues of previous samples from the sample container therefore all containers and sampling equipment should be thoroughly cleaned before use Appendix A Revision 0 Page 19 of 52 Hydrazine Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Storage If the sample cannot be analyzed immediately collect it under acid Add 90 ml of sample to 100 ml of 1 9 one volume conc HCI mixed with nine volumes 20 Quality Control
21. It should be noted however that compositing can mask problems by diluting isolated concentrations of some hazardous compounds below detection limits For sampling situations involving hazardous wastes grab sampling techniques are generally preferred because grab sampling minimizes the amount of time sampling personnel must be in contact with the wastes reduces risks associated with compositing unknowns and eliminates chemical changes that might occur due to compositing Compositing is still often used for environ mental samples and may be used for hazardous samples under certain conditions For example compositing of hazardous waste is often performed after compati bility tests have been completed to determine an average value over a number of different locations groups of drums This procedure provides data that can be useful by providing an average concentration within a number of units can serve to keep analytical costs down and can provide information useful to transporters and waste disposal operations Section 1 5 Revision 0 Page 1 of 5 1 5 SAMPLING PLAN Before any sampling activities are begun it is imperative that the purpose and goals of a program and the equipment methodologies and logistics to be used during the actual sampling be identified in the form of a work or sampling plan This plan is developed when it becomes evident that a field investigation is necessary and should be initiated in conjunction with or imm
22. Protection Association NFPA a forerunner in this endeavor has created minimum standards in its National Electrical Code NEC which is published every 3 years This code spells out among other things the following Types of controls acceptable for use in hazardous atmospheres Types of areas in which hazardous atmospheres can generated and the types of materials that generate these atmospheres HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES Depending upon the response worker s background the term hazardous atmosphere conjures up situations ranging from toxic air contaminants to flammable atmospheres For our purposes an atmosphere is hazardous if it meets the following criteria It is a mixture of any flammable material in air see Class and Group below whose composition is within this material s flammable range LEL LFL e A critical volume of the mixture is sufficiently heated by an outside ignition source e The resulting exothermic reaction propagates the flame beyond where it started Hazardous atmospheres can be produced by one of three general types of materials e Flammable gases vapors Combustible dusts e Ignitable fibers Appendix F Revision 0 Page 3 of 7 Whereas the flammable material may define the hazard associated with a given product the occurrence of release how often the material generates a hazardous atmosphere dictates the risk Two types of releases are associated with hazardous atmos
23. areas may be substantially altered and not representative of the conditions deeper in the subsurface They can however yield some information if properly interpreted If the area in question is without developed wells they are certainly worth consideration especially for the ease with which they can be sampled A stainless steel scoop of the type found in ice machines is ideal for collecting samples from seeps The flat bottom can be pressed against the bank and the water will flow with very little additional disturbance into the scoop for transfer to the sample bottles It is important to collect the sample as close to the actual seep as possible to reduce contact time with the atmosphere and potential for surface contamination For the purposes of this document groundwater monitoring via wells will include only the actual sampling of existing wells The methods and techniques for placement construction and development of wells for groundwater monitoring are varied and complicated The Manual for Ground Water Sampling Procedures and NEIC Manual for Groundwater Subsurface Investigations at Hazardous Waste Sites provide considerable information for establishing a full groundwater monitoring program including the completion of monitor wells It is however necessary to know the well depth diameter construction material type and size of the well screen if used vertical position of the well screen or slotted section of casing and type o
24. cargo only aircraft delete non applicable 4 Radioactive Material Each person who offers any radioactive material for trans portation aboard a passenger carrying aircraft shall sign mechanically or manually a printed certificate stating that the shipment contains radioactive material in tended for use in or incident to research medical diagnosis or treatment NOTE See Sec 175 10 for exceptions C SIGNATURE The certifications required above must be legibly signed mechanically or manually by a principal officer partner or employee of the shipper or his agent Sec 172 204 0 D EXCEPTIONS Except for a hazardous waste no certification is required for hazardous material offered for transportation by motor vehicle and transported 1 In a cargo tank supplied by the carrier or 2 By the shipper as a private carrier except for hazardous material that isto reshipped or transferred from one carrier to another 3 No certification is required for the return of an empty tank car which previously contained a hazardous material and which has not been cleaned or purged HAZARDOUS WASTE MANIFEST INFORMATI ON The following information has been abstracted fromthe Code of Federal Regulations CFR Title 49 Parts 100 177 and CFR Title 40 Part 262 1 DEFINITIONS A HAZARDOUS WASTE MANIFEST CFR Title 40 262 20 waste manifest isa shipping document on which all hazardous wastes are identifie B SHIPPING PAPER
25. e g for enforcement purposes Since judgment approaches tend to allow investigator bias to influence decisions care must be exercised Poor judgment can lead to poor quality data and improper conclusions If judgment sampling is employed it is generally advisable that enough samples be collected to lend credence to any conclusion drawn about the area under investigation because it is very difficult to actually measure sample accuracy This is especially true for enforcement samples where the analytical results indicate no apparent sign of contamination In such cases it is important to reduce the chance of committing a Type Il statistical error In such cases the inability to measure sample accuracy makes it difficult to rule out Type 11 errors i e the likelihood that contaminants are present at the site even if not found in the samples Hybrid Sampling Schemes In reality most sampling schemes consist of a combination or hybrid of the types previously described For example when selecting an appropriate plan for sampling drums at a hazardous waste site the drums might be initially staged based on preliminary information concerning contents program objectives etc judgment stratified sampling and then sampled randomly within the Section 1 5 Revision 1 Page 4 of 5 specified population groups random sampling Hybrid schemes are usually the method of choice as they can allow for greater diversity without compromising the obje
26. leaks or other failures Using this system a hazardous atmosphere can be routinely and adequately defined As an example a spray painting operation using acetone carrier would be classified as a Class Division 1 Group D environment Additionally an abandoned waste site containing intact closed drums of methyl ethyl ketone toluene and xylene would be considered a Class 1 Division 2 Group D environment the containers begin to leak and produce a hazardous atmosphere the environment changes to Class Division 1 Group D F3 TABLE 1 Appendix F Revision 0 Page 4 of 7 CHEMICALS BY GROUP Group Atmospheres Acetylene Group B Atmospheres Acrolein inhibited Arsine Ethylene oxide Hydrogen Manufactured gases containing more than 30 hydrogen by volume Propylene oxide Propyl nitrate Group Atmospheres Acetal dehyde Allyl alcohol n Butyral dehyde Carbon monoxi de Cyclopropane Diethyl ether Di ethyl amf ne chlorohydrin Ethylene Ethylenei mi ne Ethyl mercaptan Ethyl sulfide Hydrogen cyani de Hydrogen sulfide Morpholine 2 Ni tropropane Tetrahydrofuran Unsynmetrical dimethyl hydrazine UDMH 1 1 dimethyl hydrazine Group D Atmospheres Acetic Acid glacial Acetone Acrylonitrile Ammoni a Benzene Butane l Butanol butyl alcohol 2 Butanol secondary butyl alcohol n Butyl acetate Isobutyl acetate di Isobutylene Ethane Ethanol ethy
27. 2 3 7 05 S4nou gv 2 7 1002 9 d 33 s0dwo5 9949 2010 2 9 1003 0s shkep 82 2 o3 052 9 d 005 001 5 yz 2 7 1009 9 931506105 IA puewap 002 Dujpiou 931540 JU 390 5 4 Aluo 4949 jao 43 0 skep 82 pa4 nba4 auon 9 d 931504802 ap 140147 001 on 9315410 9190 99 qeJ5 azeuoques oot skep 82 paupnbau JUON 9 4 93150402 40 0249 9p juwoJg 0001 sJnou gy 3 7 1002 9 d Atuo 4249 008 001 Bujptou 931540 9 d Atuo 3249 9300420218 foescen 002 Sanoy 9 01 9 7 1003 9 Odd Aquo 91493578 0001 sJnou gy 2 7 1009 d 93150402 40 42 49 5035 45 oot shep et 2 7 1009 9 d 33 5s0dwo2 001 sep pI 3 7 1002 9 d 231504005 9 qo 32 425944 glaupequo awn LOA U0 43231109 paapnbau gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt N3lVM3ISVM 303 34 032084 NOILWAYISIUd ONY ONT TdWWS Q3QN34M0038 1 318Vl 49 Appendix A ision 0 Rev Page 50 of 52 panu zu0 gt A 50 3 2 43 4 34 SKep
28. 2 mil thick or thicker polyethylene bag one sample per bag Position identification tag so it can be read through bag Seal bag 4 Place sealed bag inside metal can and cushion it with enough noncombustible absorbent material for example vermiculite or diatomaceous earth between the bottom and sides of the can and bag C 6 Appendix C Revision 0 page 7 of 23 to prevent breakage and to absorb leakage Pack one bag per can Use clips tape or other positive means to hold can lid securely tightly and permanently Place one or more metal cans into a strong outside container such as metal picnic cooler or a DOT approved fiberboard box Surround cans with noncombustible absorbent cushioning material for stability during transport Limited quantities of flammable liquids for the purpose of the exclusion are defined as one pint or less 49 CFR part 173 118 2 Limited quantities of flammable solids for the purpose of this exclusion are defined as one pound net weight in inner containers and no greater than 25 pounds net weight in the outer container 49 CFR part 173 153 1 Marking Labeling 1 2 Use abbreviations only where specified Place following information either hand printed or in label form on the metal card e Laboratory Name and Address e Flammable Liquid n o s UN1993 or Flammable Solid n o s 011325 Not otherwise specified n o s is not used if the flammable liquid
29. 30 1 3 dichloromopane 90 epichlorohydrin 1 chloro 2 3 epoxy propane 30 3 chloro 1 butane 5 allyl chloride 4 4 chloro 1 butene 10 1 chl 2 20 chlorobenzene 150 o dichlorobenzene 300 m dichlorobenzene 400 benzyl chloride 500 bromoform 100 ethylene dibromi de 60 bromobenzene 300 Halogenated chloroethyl ethyl ether 10 Ethers Bis chloromethyl ether 120 Ni trosami nes N nitrosodi methylami ne 90 N nitrosodiethylamine 420 Oxygenated acrolein 3 Hydrocarbons gl yci dal dehyde 40 propylene oxi de 4 butadiene diepoxide 210 cyclohexene oxide 330 styrene oxide 930 continued 4 39 Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 8 of 15 TABLE 4 7 continued phenol 330 acetophenone 600 B propiolactone 100 Ni trogenous nitromethane 9 Hydrocarbons aniline 680 Sulfur diethyl sulfate 1 Compounds ethyl methane sulfate 830 Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 9 of 15 4 gt pue 10 911814 MAE NOILn30S dvos u313NV1OH ONITG NYS 1081NO2 14315 3A1VA 31033N PERS 9 399 81972 1439405 88 772 OSNIGAL 4 4 g Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 10 of 15 Calculate flow rate at standard conditions as follows Tee Pc Fe Pees Pstd Nomencl ature F flow rate at standard conditions liters min min f actual flow rat
30. April 1983 Section 4 2 9 Revision 0 Page 1 of 6 4 2 9 METHOD IV 9 DETERMINATION OF TOTAL SUSPENDED PARTICULATE IN AMBIENT AIR USING HIGH VOLUME SAMPLING TECHNI QUE Description Ambient air is drawn into a covered housing and through a filter by means of a high volume blower at flow rates between 1 13 to 1 70 m min 40 to 60 ft min Particles within the size range of 100 to 0 1 ym diameter collected on the filter although sampler flow rate and geometry tends to favor particles less than 60 ym aerodynamic diameter The mass concentration of suspended particulate is computed by measuring the mass of collected particulate gravimetric analysis and the volume of air sampled High volume ambient air samplers Figures 4 5 and 4 6 are readily available from a number of vendors and should meet the specifications described in 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix B Reference Method for the Determination of Suspended Particulate in the Atmosphere High Volume Method Filter media glass fiber filters with a collection efficiency of at least 99 percent for particles of 0 3 pm diameter are also specified for use Other types of filter media e g paper or specially prepared filters may be desired in instances where specific analysis is contemplated or low background levels of certain pollutants is desired After sample collection pretared filters are analyzed gravimetrically to determine the total particulate loading Trace metal analyses may be
31. Atkinson 53538 414 563 2446 National Draeger Inc 101 Technology Drive Pittsburgh PA 15275 412 787 8383 National Mine Service Company Industrial Safety Division 355 Old Steubenville Pike Oakdale PA 15071 412 788 4353 Photovac Incorp 134 Doncaster Ave Unit 2 Thornhill Ontario Canada L3T1L3 Powers Electric Products Company P 0 Box 11591 Fresno CA 93774 Research Appliance Company Moose Lodge Road Cambridge MD 21613 301 228 9505 8 6 Appendix Revision 0 Page 6 of 12 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 M 48 49 Research Instrument RR No 2 Guelph Ontario Canada N1H6H8 519 822 1547 Manufacturing Co Rexnord Safety Products Biomarine 45 Great Valley Parkway Malvern PA 19355 215 647 7200 R S Landauer Jr Company Division of Technical Science Road Glenwood IL 60425 312 755 7000 Sensorex 9713 Bolsa Ave Westmi nster CA 92683 714 554 7090 Sierra Instruments Inc P 0 Box 909 Carmel Valley 408 659 3177 CA 93924 Soiltest Inc 2205 Lee Street Evanston IL 60202 312 869 5500 Spectrex Corporation 3594 Haven Ave Redwood City 415 365 6567 CA 94063 Technical Associates 7051 Eton Avenue Canoya Park CA 91303 213 883 7043 Timco Manufacturing Company Inc 0 Box 35 Prairie Du Sac 608 643 8534 53578 Victoreen Inc 10101 Woodland Ave Cleveland OH 44104 216 795 8200 B 7 nd
32. Ground Subsurface Investigations at Hazardous Waste Sites 330 9 81 002 1981 Gibb J P R M Schuller and A Griffin Monitoring Well Sampling and Preservation Techniques EPA 600 9 80 010 March 1980 U S Environmental Protection Agency Procedures Manual for Groundwater Monitoring at Solid Waste Disposal Facilities EPA 530 SW 611 August 1977 Gibb J P R M Schuller and R A Griffin Collection of Representative Water Quality Data From Monitoring Wells in Land Disposal Section 4 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 4 0 GASES VAPORS AND AEROSOLS 4 1 GENERAL Air monitoring at hazardous waste sites and environmental spills can be quite useful as an indicator of potential safety problems and as a means of screening for the presence of possible airborne contaminants Monitoring is also important as a means of determining the specific identity and concentration of airborne toxic and hazardous pollutants onsite and the extent of their migration offsite for both worker and public health risk assessments For the purpose of this document sampling for gases vapors and aerosols at hazardous waste sites and environmental spills falls into three general categories the ambient atmosphere soil gases and container headspace gases 4 1 Section 4 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 4 2 AMBIENT Ambient concentrations of airborne contaminants are greatly affected by the topography and meteorology of the surrounding area a
33. H gt 2 2 E 5 3 3 amp 3 a 9 2 EJ ELITS D 10 E PROJECT NAME STA NO OATE Distribution Original to Coordinator Field Files Copy to Facility SAMPLERS Signature Split Samples Offered Transterred by ied PROJ NO Appendix D Revision 0 Page 11 of 11 Laboratory Custody Procedures An onsite sample bank the sampling laboratory area and any analytical laboratory used for analyses are considered to be working laboratories subject to laboratory custody procedures Each laboratory should have a designated sample custodian who implements a system to maintain control of the samples This includes accepting custody of arriving samples verifying that information on the sample tags match the Chain of Custody Record assigning unique laboratory numbers and laboratory sample tags and distributing the samples to the analyst The designated custodian is also responsible for retaining all original identifying tags data sheets and laboratory records as part of the permanent project file Questions Problems Concerning Custody Records If a discrepancy between sample tag numbers and custody record listings if found the person receiving custody should document this and properly store the samples The samples should not be analyzed until the problem is resolved The responsible person receiving custody should attempt to resolve the problem by checking all availab
34. Operation Because of the nature of the material to be sampled the hazards encountered during sampling and the cumbersome safety equipment sometimes required the sampling procedures selected must be relatively easy to follow and equipment simple to operate Equipment should be portable lightweight rugged and if possible direct reading Comparability with Analytical Considerations The uncertainty of sample integrity as it relates to the analytical techniques to be used should be reduced whenever possible Errors induced by poorly selected sampling techniques especially those used in uncontrolled situations can be the weakest link in the quality of the generated data Special consideration must therefore be given to the selection of sampling methods in relation to any adverse effects that might surface during analysis Proper materials of construction sample or species loss and chemical reactivity are some of the factors that must receive attention Section 1 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 Versatility The diversity and sheer numbers of potential parameters and scenarios often preclude the use of novel approaches that are designed or better suited for classifying a small number of compounds in a limited defined environment The methods in question must be adaptable to a variety of sampling situations and chemical matrices This factor should not however jeopardize sample integrity Safety The risk to sampling personnel intrinsic
35. Page 26 of 52 Nitrate and Nitrite Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles conc sulfuric acid HoSO4 ACS Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Store samples at 4 C All samples should be analyzed within 48 hours of collection If nitrate or nitrate plus nitrite are to be determined preserve the sample by addition of 2504 to a pH of 2 0 or less Sulfuric acid should not be added to samples requiring analysis for nitrite only Quality Control Nitrate and nitrite determinations should be made promptly after sampling Appendix A Revision 0 Page 27 of 52 Oil and Grease Apparatus and Materials Glass bottles Conc sulfuric acid HoSO4 ACS Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Collect a representative sample in a wide mouth glass bottle and acidify in the sample bottle with conc sulfuric acid to a pH of 2 0 or less If other parameters are to be analyzed for collect a separate sample for the oil and grease determination to avoid subdividing the sample in the laboratory Store samples at 4 C All samples should be analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control Because losses of grease will occur on sampling equipment the collection of a composite sample is impractical Individual portions collected at prescribed intervals must be analyzed separately to obtain the average concentration over an extended period of time Appendi
36. Pump 3 4 5 Method 111 11 Sampling Monitor Wells with a Submersible Pump 3 5 References 4 0 Gases Vapors and Aerosols 4 1 General 4 2 Ambient 4 2 1 Method IV 1 Determining Oxygen Content in Ambient and Workplace Environments with a Portable Oxygen Monitor 4 2 2 Method IV 2 Determination of Combustible Gas Levels Using a Portable Combustible Gas Indicator 4 2 3 Method IV 3 Monitoring Organic Vapors Using a Portable Flame lonization Detector 4 2 4 Method IV 4 Monitoring Toxic Gases and Vapors Using a Photoionization Detector 4 2 5 Method 1V 5 Use of Portable Field Operable Gas Chromatographs 4 2 6 Method IV 6 Stain Detector Tube Method for Sampling Gaseous Compounds 4 2 7 Method IV 7 Sampling for Volatile Organics in Ambient Air Using Solid Sorbents 4 2 8 Method IV 8 Collecting Semivolatile Organic Compounds Using Polyurethane Foam 4 2 9 Method 10 9 Determination of Total Suspended Particulate in Ambient Air Using High Volume Sampling Technique 4 3 Soil Gases and Vapors 4 3 1 Method IV 10 Monitoring Gas and Vapors from Test Hole 4 3 2 Method IV 11 Monitoring Gas and Vapors from Wells vi Revision Section 5 0 CONTENTS continued 4 4 Headspace Gases 4 4 1 Method 1V 12 Sampling of Headspace Gases Semisealed Vessels 4 4 2 Method 1V 13 Sampling of Headspace Gases Sealed Vessels 4 5 References lonizing Radiation 5 1 General 5 2 Personnel Monitors 5 3 Survey Instruments 5 3 1 Method V
37. Safety Officer is primarily responsible for all safety procedures and operations Command Post Supervisor serves a means of communication and never enters the exclusive area except for emergencies Work Party performs the onsite tasks necessary to fulfill the objectives Please note that in many hazardous waste projects one person may fulfill many roles Statistical Strategy Implementation of the proper statistical strategy depends upon two essential points the objectives or goals of the sampling plan and the amount of information available on the parameter or parameters of interest i e time spatial distribution variability etc The following are among the different sampling schemes that could be chosen Random Sampling Random sampling uses the theory of random chance probabilities to choose representative sample locations Random sampling is generally employed when little information exists concerning the material location etc It is most effective when the population of available sampling locations is large enough 1 10 Section 1 5 Revision 0 Page 3 of 5 to lend statistical validity to the random selection process Since one of the main difficulties with random sampling deals with achieving a truly random sample it is advisable to use a table of random numbers to eliminate or reduce bias Appendix Systematic Sampling Systematic sampling involves the collection of samples at predetermined
38. Safety and Health Administration MSHA as being safe in such atmospheres There so many Groups Classes and Divisions that it is impossible to certify an all inclusive instrument Therefore select a certified device based on the chemicals and conditions most likely to be en countered For example device certified for a Class 11 Division 1 Group E combustible metal dust would offer little protection around a flammable vapor or gas Fe Appendix G Revision 0 Page 1 of 4 APPENDIX G APPLICABLE TABLES G 1 Appendix G Revision 0 Page 2 of 4 TABLE G 1 RANDOM NUMBERS INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF THE RANDOM NUMBER TABLE 1 Number the members of the lot i e the drums onsite the sections within a grid in a numerical order 2 Decide on the number of samples necessary This should be a number sufficient to give statistical significant data Ten to 20 percent is usually adequate This number should be predetermined in the test plan or should coincide with the time and equipment available 3 Using the set of random numbers above choose any number as a starting point then proceed to select the next number in any predetermined direction i e down the column across the rows until the selection process has yielded the desired number of samples 6 2 Appendix G Revision 0 Page 3 of 4 TABLE 6 2 CONVERSION FACTORS TABLES OF MEASUREMENT MISCELLANEOUS M one thousand 1 grain 64 8 mil
39. Section 3 2 3 Revision 0 Page 3 of 4 TEFLON CONNECTOR 6 MM 1 0 GLASS TUBING STOPPER TO FIT FLASK OR SAMPLE BOTTLE TYGON TEFLON TUBING TURING 6 MM O D PERISTALTIC PUMP I LITER ERLENMEYER X OR SAMPLE BOTTLE QUTLET Source Reference 4 Figure 3 3 Peristaltic pump for liquid sampling modified 3 12 Section 3 2 3 Revision 0 Page 4 of 4 1 Label the sample bottle with an appropriate tag Be sure to complete the tag with all necessary information Record the information in the field logbook and complete the chain of custody documents Allow system to drain then disassemble Return tubing to lab for decontamination if feasible See Appendix E for general decontamination procedures Sources U S Environmental Protection Agency Procedures Manual for Ground Water Monitoring at Solid Waste Disposal Facilities EPA 530 SW 611 August 1977 3 13 Section 3 2 4 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 3 2 4 METHOD 111 4 COLLECTION OF WATER SAMPLES FROM DEPTH WITH A KEMMERER BOTTLE Discussion The kemmerer bottle is a messenger activated water sampling device see Figure 3 4 In the open position water flows easily through the device Once lowered to the desired depth a messenger is dropped down the sample line tripping the release mechanism and closing the bottle In the closed position the bottle is sealed both on top and bottom from any additional contact with the water column and can be retrieved Mo
40. The sample concentration is then reported as the ppm equivalent of the calibration compound Most units are calibrated with a known concentration of methane however almost any gaseous hydrocarbon that produces a response can be used Many models also have built in calibration circuits which can insure that the electronic response to a known signal remains constant Some models can be equipped with an option that provides chromatographic separation of the sample gas constituents This permits a tentative qualification and quantification to be made of the resultant peaks which have retention times equal to those of known standards This option requires the use of a chart recorder for recording the peak areas and retention times and in such a mode prevents the instrument from providing a continuous readout Use of a chromatographic option also requires additional expertise if reliable consistent results are desired Most portable FID s rely on the sample gas to supply the combustion air to the detector flame so they are designed to operate in ambient atmospheres with relatively normal oxygen concentrations 21 percent This design precludes the sampling of process vents poorly ventilated or sealed containers or any sample gas hydrocarbon concentration sufficient to reduce the available oxygen or otherwise saturate the detector In such instances adaptations are usually available to supply a source of oxygen from a compressed gas bottle or introd
41. a thin tube sampler through the soil or sample recovery may be poor Sampling directly from the auger may be the only viable method Several auger types are available which include Bucket type continues flight screw and posthole augers Bucket types are good for direct sample recovery and are fast and provide a large volume of sample When continuous flight screw augers are utilized the sample can be collected directly off the flights however this technique will provide a somewhat unrepresentative sample as the exact sample depth will not be known The continuous flights auger are however satisfactory for use when a composite of the entire soi column is desired Posthole augers have limited utility for sample acquisition as they are designed more for their ability to cut through fibrous heavily rooted swampy areas In soils where the borehole will not remain open when the tool is removed a temporary casing can be used until the desired sampling depth is reached Uses This system can be used in a wide variety of soil conditions It can be used to sample both from the surface by simply driving the corer without preliminary boring or to depths in excess of 6 meters The presence of rock layers and the collapse of the borehole however usually prohibit sampling at depths in excess of 2 meters Interchangeable cutting tips on the corer reduce the disturbance to the soil during sampling and aid in maintaining the core in the device during r
42. and cross contamination Peristaltic pumps can be used for sampling in most shallow wells They require a minimum of down hole equipment and cross contamination can be eliminated b replacement of the suction tubing between wells Gibb as well as NCASI found little difference between samples withdrawn by a peristaltic pump and those taken by a bailer These pumps however may not be suitable for the collection of volatile organics due to possible gas stripping therefore their use should be supplemented by a bailer when sampling includes volatile organic species The use of submersible pumps as described previously for sample collection is possible provided they are constructed of suitably noncontaminating materials They can operate at depths beyond the capabilities of peristaltic pumps and at which depths bailing becomes tedious The chief drawback however is the difficulty of avoiding cross contamination between wells These systems are generally too expensive to allow for several separate units Though some units can be easily disassembled and allow for replacement of most sample contacted surfaces field decontamination still may be difficult and should properly require solvents that may lead to sample contamination Their use therefore in multiple well programs should be carefully considered against bailers In general gas pressure displacement systems where gas interfaces with the liquid should not be used for sample collection as they
43. approach supplemented by a minimal holding time Containerization and preservation requirements are detailed in Appendix A Label the sample bottle with the appropriate sample tag Be sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Complete all chain of custody documents and record in the field logbook 7 Decontaminate sampling equipment after use and between sample locations according to the guidelines presented in Appendix 2 9 Section 2 3 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 2 3 2 METHOD Il 4 SAMPLING SLUDGE OR SEDIMENTS WITH A HAND CORER Discussion This device is essentially the same type of thin wall corer described for collecting soil samples Method 11 2 It is modified by the addition of a handle to facilitate driving the corer see Figure 2 2 and a check valve on top to prevent washout during retrieval through an overlying water layer Uses Hand corers are applicable to the same situations and materials as the scoop described in Method 11 3 It has the advantage of collecting an undisturbed sample which can profile any stratification in the sample as a result of changes in the deposition Some hand corers can be fitted with extension handles which will allow the collection of samples underlying a shallow layer of liquid Most corers can also be adapted to hold liners generally available in brass polycarbonate plastic or Teflon Care should be taken to choose a material which will
44. are specific for individual compounds and require specific sampling techniques This information is supplied with the tubes and details the required sample volume proper tube preparation and insertion into the pump and a discussion of the applicability and limitations of the tube In general the tubes are opened by snapping off the tips on either end and inserting them into the pump so that the arrow on the tube indicates flow toward the pump The required sample volume is then pulled through the tube An indicator chemical in the tube will demonstrate a color change the length of which is proportional to the concentration of the compound in question The detector tube and pump are the two major components of the system Pumps used for drawing air through the tubes come in two basic forms bellows pump and piston type syringe These pumps are manufactured under strict specifications so as to draw only a specified volume of gas and are designed to be used with tubes of the same manufacturer Uses Stain detector tubes are useful for screening sources to verify the Presence of suspected compounds and to provide some degree of quantification They are generally inadequate for ambient air sampling applications due to the low sample volumes collected They are more useful for detection of compounds at higher levels such as in drums confined work areas pockets or depressions etc Procedure for Use 1 Perform necessary pump leak check procedure
45. as ORM A C or 0 B ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION FOR SHIPPING PAPERS Sec 172 203 g 1 The shipping paper for a rail car containing a hazardous material must contain the notation Placarded followed by the name of the placard required for the rail 2 The shipping paper for each specification DOT 112A or 114A tank car without head shields containing a flammable compressed gas must contain the notation DOT 112A or DOT 114A as appropriate and either Must be handled in accordance with FRA E O 5 Shove to rest per E O 5 NOTE For additional details refer to Part 174 1 TRANSPORTATION BY AIR A SHIPPING PAPERS ABOARD AIRCRAFT 175 35 A copy of the shipping papers required by E 175 30 2 must accompany the shipment it covers during transportation aboard an aircraft NOTE The documents required shipping papers and notification of pilot in command may he i one document it is given to the pilot in command before departure t 5 175 35 b B NOTIFICATION OF PILOT LN COMMAND Sec 175 33 The operator of the aircraft shall give the pilot in command the following information in writing before takeoff Sec 175 35 1 Description of hazardous material on shipping papers Sec 172 202 and 172 203 2 Location of the hazardous material in the aircraft and 3 The results of the inspection requirements by Sec 175 30 b NOTE For additional details refer to Part 175 8 TRA
46. as soon as possible after collection maximum holding time should not exceed 7 days Ouality Control Glassware used in TOX sampling and analysis must be thoroughly cleaned All glassware should be washed using detergent and hot water rinsed with tap water and as a final rinse deionized water Drain dry and heat at 105 C for 1 hour Glassware should be sealed and stored in a clean area after drying and cooling Appendix A Revision 0 Page 48 of 52 Turbidity Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling e Store samples at 4 C e All samples must be analyzed within 48 hours of collection Quality Control 6 Turbidity analysis should be performed on the day the sample is taken If longer storage is unavoidable store samples in the dark for up to 48 hours Prolonged storage before measurement is not recommended because irreversible changes in turbidity may occur panuj3u02 i 0 15101 Page 49 of 52 Appendix A Rev LOH 6 1 03 aydwes jo 4 06 ppoe 4apun 3291102 AL aze pou 001 skep 2 you 41 9 d 931500002 qeuy ou zeJpAH 001 43406 9 gt ud o3 EONH 99 93150402 SSaupJeH 00 82 paupnbau JUON d 93150402 4249 pppoe 219405 005 pt 69 0 lt Hd 03 HORN 9 d 331504105 40 4249 ap pueda 001 82 2 1009 9 d 23150602 JO
47. aua Ayr 9 12 L S9 5 awry punodwo4 spuosas 3 05 2 318v 4 25 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 10 of 14 penutquo2 2 12 LAu1oW 8 79 ueungoupAyesya 2 12 9Pi40 U21Q 30314013 p 6S 91e392V 4 33 8 61 N ourdoug L 9S L u39W 9 81 U403040 U 8 99 U403040 L49 9 81 91e3e2V L4u13 9 67 9 81 9uexoH 6 6 Louedoud 9 81 90039 14433 LAu189N L 8t auozay Aya LAu39N 8 91 911431401 Addy 2 v 931e322V AULA 6 9T AULA 98 6 ST 9L143100392y 0 9LL43tu0 vb SPLAOLYD AULA 1 05 911431403 5 2 71 II 40944 TOE EII uoasJ4j 2 VI T O azeyaoy 1 3 2 Vl 0402 4 1 0 ap luoL yy aus 2 71 14014 aua Ay eW 9 2 1 el 9U0392y L SQ 4 33 ayeqaoy 2 S2 4 0143 33 2 92 auapl AULA bel 9ue4u13 6 52 10143212433 10 1 spuodas punoduo Spuodes 39 M 980 NO TOT AO 1N323U3d OT HONI 8 311 NOIIN313U 03193135 e b 31891 4 26 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 11 of 14 8 811 35 0 0001 Ang 8 76 auazuag 14433 2 916 15 9 58 ULPLA d tus euezueg 14
48. cm in diameter and 30 5 to 61 0 cm long The tube is forced into the soil then extracted Friction will usually hold the sample material in the tube during the extraction The construction material is generally steel and some samplers can utilize plastic liners and interchangeable cutting tips The liners are useful for trace element sampling but are generally not suitable for organic analysis due to the possibility that materials in the liner will 2 2 Section 2 2 Revision 1 Page 2 of 2 leach out and become incorporated as part of the sample The liner tubes can further be capped off and used as sample containers for transport to the lab Interchangeable cutting tips facilitate smoother penetration with reduced sample disturbance They are available in various styles and construction suitable for moist dry sandy or heavy duty applications The design of these cutting tips will further aid in maintaining the sample in the tube during sample extraction Augers are also very effective for soil sampling Bucket type augers can be used directly for soil sample collection or to advance a borehole to the desired depth so then a thin wall tube can be employed Kits are available that include in conjunction with the tube sampler and cutting tips an auger point and a series of extension rods These kits allow for hand augering a borehole The auger can then be removed and a tube sampler lowered and forced into the soil at the completion depth
49. exterior container e Flammable Liquid n o s UN1993 or Flammable Solid n o s UN1325 e Limited Quantity or Ltd Qty Net weight or net volume weight or volume be abbreviated just before or just after Flammable Liquid n o s UN1325 or Flammable Solid n o s UN1325 Further descriptions such as Laboratory Samples or Cargo Aircraft Only if applicable are allowed if they do not contradict required information 3 Include chain of custody record properly executed in outside container if legal use of samples is required or anticipated Transportation 1 Transport unknown hazardous substance samples classified as flammable liquids by rented or common carrier truck railroad or express overnight package services 2 Do not transport by any passenger carrying air transport system even if they have cargo only aircraft DOT regulations permit regular airline cargo only aircraft but difficulties with most suggest avoiding them Instead ship by airlines that only carry cargo 6 8 ji Other PROCEDURES Packaging 1 6 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 9 of 23 Transport by government owned vehicle including aircraft DOT regulations do not apply but EPA personnel will still use procedures described except for execution of the bill of lading with certification Considerations Check with analytical laboratory for size of sample to be collected and if sample should be preserved or
50. from commercial kitchen and laboratory supply houses It is often necessary to collect liquid samples at some distance from shore or the edge of the containment In this instance an adaptation which extends the reach of the technician is advantageous Such a device is the pond sampler as devised by the California Department of Health It incorporates a telescoping heavy duty aluminum pole with an adjustable beaker clamp attached to the end see Method 111 2 The beaker previously 3 2 Section 3 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 described a disposable glass or plastic container or the actual sample container itself can be fitted into the clamp In situations where cross contamination is of concern use of a disposable container or the actual sample container is always advantageous The cost of properly cleaning usually outweighs the cost of disposal of otherwise reusable glassware or bottles This is especially true when the cleanup must be done in the field The potential contamination of samples for volatile organic analysis by the mere presence of organic solvents necessary for proper field cleaning is usually too great to risk Another method of extending the reach of sampling efforts is the use of a small peristaltic pump see Method 111 3 In this method the sample is drawn in through heavy wall Teflon tubing and pumped directly into the sample container This system allows the operator to reach out into the liquid body sample from d
51. gases are often found in certain types of containers Bulging stainless steel lined or other special designated drums are more likely to contain hazardous headspace gases A preliminary scan of the external seams edges or any corroded areas with a vapor analyzer may indicate the nature of the contents Poorly ventilated vessels can usually be sampled for headspace gases through small hatches or openings Fully sealed vessels must be approached more cautiously since breaching may result in the uncontrolled release of pressurized gases or the potential for violent reactions with the ambient atmosphere Any decision to open a sealed vessel should be based on sound need and the investigator must be cognizant of the inherent dangers and take appropriate safety precautions Section 4 4 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 4 4 1 METHOD 11 12 SAMPLING OF HEADSPACE GASES IN SEMISEALED VESSELS Discussion Sampling of headspace gases involves merely extending the intake or otherwise conducting the contained gas to the detection device Any of the procedures discussed in the ambient section Methods IV 1 through IV 8 can employed The use of Teflon tubing of approximately 4 8 or 6 4 mm 3 16 or 1 4 inch inside diameter works well as a probe extension Uses This systemis viable in a wide variety of applications It is simple and only requires some adaption to match the extension tubing to the instrument intake The likelihood of high concentrat
52. have been shown to cause considerable changes in the groundwater character Section 3 4 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 3 4 1 METHOD 111 7 PURGING PERISTALTIC PUMP Discussion The peristaltic pump as described in the surface water sampling section Method 111 3 can be implemented for the presample purging of groundwater monitor wells Uses The use of a peristaltic pump for well purging is particularly advantageous since the same systemcan later be used for sample collection see Method 111 10 The application however is limited to wells with a depth of less than approximately 8 meters due to the limited lift capabilities of peristaltic action Procedures for Use 1 Using clean equipment sound well for total depth and water level then calculate the fluid volume in the casing casing volume 2 Determine depth from casing top to mid point of screen or wel section open to aquifer Consult drillers log or sound for bottom 3i If depth to mid point of screen is in excess of 8 meters choose alternate system 4 Lower intake into the well to a short distance below the water leve and begin water removal Collect or dispuse of purged water in an acceptable manner Lower suction intake as required to maintain submergence 5 Measure rate of discharge frequently A bucket and stopwatch are most commonly used 6 Purge minimum of four casing volumes or until discharge pH temperature or conductivity stabil
53. instructions it is important that their existence and basic characteristics be mentioned in this section For this reason the three basic types of personnel monitors namely film badges thermoluminescent dosimeters and ion chambers will be discussed as to the specific characteristics and relative advantages of each Film Badge The use of films for monitoring personnel exposure is considered to be the most practical although least accurate of the existing methods The method employs a gelatin base with a silver halide spread on film or glass Radiation interacts within the silver halide in the emulsion by means of ionizations thereby causing the formation of a latent image which upon development is converted into a black deposit of metallic silver This darkening can then be related to the type energy and quantity of radiation received by the film badge It is capable of recording a permanent record of personnel exposure Thermolumi nescent _ Dosi meters Thermoluminescent dosimeters TLD can replace film badges for most applications In general they are more sensitive and more accurate than film badges and can be processed more quickly and less expensively These devices detect radiation by storing ionization energy in defects of the crystal latice of certain doped solids such as LiF Mn and Ca F Mn The altered energy levels are read out by heating the solid which then releases visible light The light output is proportional to
54. is desired it may be prudent to use a separate bailer for each well Sources Dunlap W J McNabb J F Scalf M R and Crosby R L Sampling for Organic Chemicals and Microorganism in the Subsurface EPA 600 2 77 176 August 1977 Section 3 4 4 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 3 4 4 METHOD 111 10 SAMPLING MONITOR WELLS WITH A PERISTALTIC PUMP Discussion A pump system is considerably advantageous when analytical requirements demand sample volumes in excess of several liters The major drawback of a pump system is the potential for increased volatile component stripping as result of the required lift vacuum Samples for volatile organic analysis should be collected with a bailer as described in Method 111 9 and should precede any sample collection which may further disturb the well bore content Uses The peristaltic pump system can be used for monitor well sampling whenever the lift requirements do not exceed 8 meters for deeper wells see Method 11 11 It becomes particularly important to use a heavy wall tubing in this application in order to prevent tubing collapse under the high vacuums needed for lifting from depth Procedures for Use 1 Using clean noncontaminating equipment i e an electronic leve indicator avoid indicating paste determine the water level in the well then calculate the fluid volume in the casing 2 Purge well as per Methods 111 7 or 111 8 3 If soundings show sufficient level of recovery p
55. is important to distinguish between the type of media to be sampled and the sampling technique that yields a specific type of sample In relation to the media to be sampled two basic types of samples can be considered the environmental sample and the hazardous sampl e Environmental samples ambient air soils rivers streams or biota are generally dilute in terms of pollutant concentration and usually do not require the special handling procedures used for concentrated wastes However in certain instances environmental samples can contain elevated concentrations of pollutants and in such cases would have to be handled as hazardous samples Hazardous or concentrated samples are those collected from drums tanks lagoons pits waste piles fresh spills etc and require special handling procedures because of their potential toxicity or hazard These samples can be further subdivided based on their degree of hazard however care should be taken when handling and shipping any wastes believed to be concentrated regardless of the degree In general two basic types of sampling techniques are recognized both of which can be used for either environmental or concentrated samples Grab Samples A grab sample is defined as a single sample representative of a specific location at a given point in time The sample is collected all at once and at one particular point in the sample medium The representativeness of such samples is defined b
56. is made field portable with the addition of a field pack containing battery and gas supplies Field usable detectors include an FID and a PID with a selction of lamps ranging from 9 5 11 7 eV Sentex Sensing Technology Scentor Automated Gas Chromatography This is a relative new instrument utilizing an Argon lonization Electron Capture or Flame lonization Detector Sampling and analysis are completely automated Samples are collected on a sorbent cartridge then thermally desorbed into the GC column The instrument maintains a knowns standard gas internally for use in quantification Sensitivities for most organic compounds are reported at the low ppb range and low part per trillion range for polar compounds In theory any compound which can pass through a gas chromatographic column as a discrete peak and is capable of being detected by the detector is amenable to this method practice this may not always be the case A partial list of compounds measured in the field with portable GCs is given in Table 4 1 Some of the factors which could be considered before using a field portable GC in a field survey are as follows 1 Column Selection Selection of appropriate gas chromatography column packing and column length is necessary A critical element in this selection is the ability of the column to elute the compound s of interest as a discrete plug at the temperature at which the column will be operated Success
57. material spills or waste site situations They are useful in screening depressions in the land unventilated rooms or other areas that may not contain enough oxygen to support life When used properly the portable oxygen monitor will indicate the percent oxygen in the test atmosphere Normal oxygen concentration required for respiration is 20 9 percent Procedures for Use 1 Make sure instrument is clean and serviceable especially sample lines and detector surfaces 2 Consult records on instrument maintenance to determine if detector solution should be changed Some instruments will need this service after as little as 1 2 weeks of use 3 Check battery charge level If in doubt charge battery as detailed in operating manual Some units have charge level indicators while others have alarms that will indicate a low charge 4 Verify that sample pump is operable if so equipped when analyzer is on 5 Turn instrument on and using calibration knob on instrument calibrate against fresh air 20 9 percent 0 by aligning meter needle at 20 9 percent 6 If unit is equipped with alarm mode set alarm at desired level 4 5 Section 4 2 1 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 A quick field check can be accomplished by exhaling into the sensor this should cause a definite drop in 02 readings and activate any alarms Allow for instrument warmup if necessary before entering site to take readings Position intake assembly or sensor in close proximi
58. of the first tasks performed when initially approaching a waste site or hazardous material spill This requirement is dictated by the potential risk to human health on contact with a radioactive source as exposure to even small amounts of energy may result in marked biological damage Radiation monitoring for hazardous waste situations essentially involves two approaches personnel monitoring and survey monitoring Personnel monitoring uses instruments designed to measure total cumulative radiation exposure which can be used to estimate the absorbed dose in units of rad or rem The instruments are worn or carried directly by the personnel being monitored and consist of such devices as film badges thermoluminescent dosi meters self reading dosimeters and pocket chambers Survey instruments are meant to measure ionizing radiation expressed as an air exposure rate in units of milliroentgens hr or activity of the source expressed as a disintegration rate counts minute As do personnel monitors these devices rely on the ability of radiation to cause ionizations and consist of ionization chambers proportional counters Geiger Mueller instruments and scintillation devices They are particularly useful in performing initial field surveys to detect and locate the presence of radioactive sources and in drum screening procedures performed prior to further drum handling i e staging sampling compositing etc Although all of these detection
59. operated within the flow rate ranges listed in the preceding discussion be set up at each location Duplicate sampers operating at the same flow rate as one or more of the listed ranges can be set up to collect duplicate samples for backup or quality assurance purposes Set trains up at desired location and hang samplers on a tripod music stand or similar device To insure stability in wind gusts weighting of these devices or some method of anchoring is advisable Nonsparking wooden stakes or fence post can be used but are more work more difficult to move which is often necessary and may incur more risk where buried hazards exist Record all initial information time counter reading cartridge number pump number sampler blank number barometric pressure ambient temperature relative humidity etc Start pump and observe system to determine if appropriate flow rate is being maintained For systems utilizing rotameters the calibrated rotameter setting should be maintained during the entire run and should be monitored regularly Any adjustments to the rotameter are made by opening or closing the needle valve and are noted in the field log Most constant flow sampling pumps have low flow indicators and or an automatic shut off feature at low flow conditions These should be initially observed and periodically monitored during the course of sampling 4 45 Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 14 of 15 a PARTICULATE FILTER OP
60. or manganese so that oxygen will not come into contact with the water Analyze these samples promptly to minimize the possibility of chemical or physical change during storage Appendix A Revision 0 Page 42 of 52 Sulfate Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling e In the presence of organic matter certain bacteria may reduce sulfate to sulfide To avoid this samples are stored at 4 C e All samples must he analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control No special precautions Appendix A Revision 0 Page 43 of 52 Apparatus and Materials e Polyethylene or glass bottles Zinc Acetate fZn C2H302 2 2 N e Sodium hydroxide NaOH 6 N Sample Collection Preservation and Handling e Take sample with a minimum of aeration Preserve sample by addition of 2 ml of 2N zinc acetate raise pH to 9 using NaOH Fill sample bottle completely allowing no headspace e Store sample at 4 e All samples must be analyzed within 7 days of collection Ouality Control e It is important that all sample bottles are sealed airtight with no entrapped air Appendix A Revision 0 Page 44 of 52 Apparatus and Materials e Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling 9 Collect a fresh water sample allow as little contact with air as possible as air will oxidize the sulfite to sulfate All sampl
61. other to provide force to pierce the septum and to prevent the plunger from being forced out by the pressure from the GC Insert the needle through the septum as far into the injection port as possible swiftly and smoothly depress the plunger hesitate one second and withdraw the needle 4 22 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 7 of 14 e Mark injection time and sample 1 0 on output recorder strip chart and start timer for monitoring retention times Record pertinent parameters in analytical logbook for documentation of analytical conditions Record retention times and peak heights or integrated peak areas if an integrator is available of each eluting peak 1 Chromatograms of blank injections should be made at frequent intervals especially after running a sample with a high contaminant loading to guard against syringe contamination At least one standard run should be made on each day of analysis or when conditions change sufficiently to warrant re calibration 4 Compound Identification Injection of standard mixtures of compounds will allow determination of retention time for each of the compounds The elution order of the compounds in these mixtures will remain constant for a given GC column and should be determined prior to field use Tables 4 2 through 4 4 give elution orders and approximate retention times for several compounds on several columns After both standards and samples have been run comparison of the s
62. prolonged exposure to air 6 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 7 of 52 Biochemical Oxygen Demand BOD Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling If possible avoid samples containing residual chlorine by sampling before chlorination Notify laboratory if sample is from a chlorinated effluent Store sample at 4 until analyzed All samples should be analyzed within 48 hours of collection Quality Control Samples for BOD analysis may undergo significant degradation during storage between collection and analysis resulting in a low BOD value Minimize reduction of BOD by promptly analyzing the sample 7 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 8 of 52 Bromide Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling There are no required preservation techniques although storage at 4 C is recommended All samples must be analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control No special precautions 8 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 9 of 52 Carbonate See Bicarbonate Carbonate 9 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 10 of 41 Chloride Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling No preservative necessary All samples must be analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control No special precautions
63. sophisticated techniques capable of resolution in the part per billion ppb range Section 1 2 Revision 1 Page 1 of 2 1 2 METHOD SELECTION CRITERIA Major emphasis must be placed on the selection of sampling methods Even limited literature survey will disclose the existence of a great number of sampling methods all of which have certain merits that warrant consideration Therefore selection criteria were chosen on which to base decisions for in cluding the sampling methods found in this manual The following is a listing not necessarily in order of relative importance of these criteria Practicality The selected methods should stress the use of simple pragmatic proven procedures capable of being used or easily adapted to a variety of situations Representativeness The essence of any sampling campaign is to collect samples that are representative of the material or medium under consideration The selected methods although strongly taking into consideration economics simplicity practicality and portability must also be capable of delivering a best practicable representation of the situation under investigation Economics The costs of equipment manpower and operational maintenance need to be considered in relation to overall benefit Instrument durability disposable equipment cost of decontamination and degree of precision and accuracy actually required are also factors to considered Simplicity or Ease of
64. the absorbed radiation energy and be related to exposure or dose units TLD s can be reused but do not provide a permanent record of exposure because the information is erased upon readout A permanent record is kept in the form of the original glow curve light output vs time or temperature trace which can be stored on paper or in electronic memory Self Reading Dosi meter A self reading dosimeter is essentially an ion chamber containing two electrodes one being a thin quartz loop free to move with respect to its mounting and the other a fixed heavy quartz fiber Like charges are placed on both loops causing the movable one to be repelled from the fixed loop lonization entering the chamber reduces the charge on the loops allowing the movable one to return towards its neutral position the distance being proportional to the dose received in the chamber The device also includes an optical system and transparent scale which permits instant results at any time without external readers They are rugged sensitive instruments small enough to be worn comfortably and extremely useful for measuring integrated exposure levels 5 3 Section 5 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 Pocket Chambers A pocket ion chamber is basically a cylindrical electrode and a coaxial collecting rod which is insulated from the rest of the device A charge is placed on the collecting rod and this charge is subsequently reduced when ions formed upon exposure to radia
65. the additional advantages of being sensitive to beta radiation Detection of alpha radiation requires another instrument having a thin window detector Either gas ionization or scintillation principles may be employed in alpha detectors This discussion will be limited to ionization chambers proportional counters Geiger Mueller counters and scintillation detectors lonization Chambers lonization chambers are instruments in which the ionization initially produced within the chamber by radiation is measured without further gas amplification It consists of a gas filled envelope usually air at atmospheric pressure with two electrodes at different electrical potentials The walls of the tube generally serve as the cathode and a wire mounted down the center of the tube serves as the anode lonizing radiation entering the chamber produces ions which migrate towards the electrode due to the applied potential producing a current This current requires amplification to a measurable level before it can be recorded on a meter These are high range instruments low sensitivity and are used extensively for measuring high intensity beta gamma or x radiation aural indication is possible with these instruments and operators must be constantly aware of the meter to determine radiation intensity lonization chambers do not record individual radiation particles but integrate all signals produced as an electric current to drive the meter They should
66. the expected sampler flow rate to insure accuracy in the field The Dickson Recorder should be tapped gently prior to reading to insure that the recorder pen is in its final position Record the airflow rate from the VRO high volume calibration curve for each flow recorder reading ACCEPTABILITY 100 Qo Qc within 5 Qc observed flow rate flow rate from calibrated curve where Qo Qc If the air flow rate exceeds the acceptable limits rerun points for which percent deviation exceeds 5 percent until acceptance limits are attained Correct the sample flow rate to standard conditions using the following formula T2 Py 02 01 Ty P2 Where 02 corrected flow rate std liters min std min 01 recorded flow rate from chart liters min min T temperature during calibration K R standard temperature 298 K 537 R atmospheric pressure during calibration mmHg in Hg standard absolute pressure 760 mmHg 29 92 in Hg Section 4 2 9 Revision 0 Page 5 of 6 Sample Collection Total suspended particulate measurements are normally collected over a 24 hour sampling period however this requirement may be altered for hazardous waste sampling applications Monitoring objectives may require sampling at specific time intervals only e g during drum excavations and high particulate loadings due to heavy equipment traffic may also require shortened sampling per
67. the zero control until the meter reads 0 percent LEL 4 9 Section 4 2 2 Revision 0 Page 3 of 4 Calibrate unit against known concentration of a calibration gas by rotating the calibration control span or gain until the meter reads the same concentration as the known standard For those instruments with internal or nonadjustable span a calibration curve should be prepared using concentrations in the range expected to be encountered If necessary adjust alarm setting to appropriate combustibility setting Position intake assembly or cell in close proximity to area in question to get accurate reading If alarm occurs or if readings reach the action levels designated in the safety plan personnel should evacuate area If instrument malfunction occurs personnel should evacuate area Some important factors to keep in mind during use are e Slow sweeping motions of intake or cell assembly will help assure that problem atmospheres are not bypassed Cover an area from floor ground to ceiling or above breathing zone Operation of unit in temperatures outside of recommended Operating range may compromise accuracy of readings or damage the instrument Platinum filament detectors may be poisoned reduced in sensitivity by gases such as leaded gasoline vapors tetraethyl lead sulfur compounds mercaptans and hydrogen sulfide and silicon compounds Many combustible gas detectors are not designed for use in oxygen enri
68. tubing Situations may still arise where a sample must be collected from depths beyond the capabilities of a peristaltic pump In this instance an at depth sampler may be required such as a Kemmerer ASTM Bomb Bacon Bomb or Van Dorn sampler These devices work well however care must be utilized in selecting devices that are made of materials that will not contaminate the sample Van Dorn samplers are not generally recommended for organics as they rely on an elastic closing mechanism that can effect samples They are readily available in a totally nonmetallic design which is very useful for sample collection for trace metal analysis Kemerer samplers are available on special order or adaptable for sample collection for organic analysis by substituting Teflon for the rubber or plastic stoppers If the device is further ordered with stainless steel metallic parts in addition to Teflon stoppers it becomes a very versatile sampler The submersible pumps discussed in conjunction with groundwater sampling Section 3 4 may also be useful in this application 3 4 Section 3 2 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 3 2 1 METHOD 111 1 SAMPLING SURFACE WATERS USING A DIPPER OR OTHER TRANSFER DEVICE Discussion A dipper or other container constructed of inert material such as stainless steel or Teflon can be used to transfer liquid wastes from their source to a sample bottle This prevents unnecessary contamination of the outer surface of the sample bo
69. when the project is complete Document control should include the use of serialized documents a document inventory procedure and an adequate document filing system all issued by under the control of and maintained by an appointed Document Control Officer DCO Table D 1 lists the principal items subject to document control during a specific project Serialized Documents Sample collection and analytical tags and chain of custody records should have preprinted serial numbers It is not necessary that a sample tag number match a custody record number however it is necessary that all issued numbers be appropriately accounted for by the DCO It is also necessary that in the event a tag or custody record is damaged lost or destroyed prior to its use its serial number and disposition are recorded Other Documents Other documents used during the conduct of a project e g field logbooks laboratory notebooks data sheets etc should be appropriately coded with a unique identifier to ensure accountability The project DCO will be responsible for development of the document identification system paying particular attention to its utility and consistency for the specified program An example of a document identification system is as follows Subcontractor Code Project Code if necessary Document Code Serial Number 00 000 000 00 ZU 00001 In addition a listing of suggested codes is shown in Table 0 2 D 2 Appendix D Revisi
70. will limt the depth from which samples can be collected and the method required to collect them Often this information on soil properties can be acquired from published soil surveys obtainable through the U S Geological Survey USGS and other government and farm agencies A comprehensive listing of these offices and currently available soil surveys is included in the NEIC Manual for Groundwater Subsurface Investigations at Hazardous Waste Sites Most of the methods employed for soil sampling at hazardous waste sites are adaptations of techniques long employed by foundation engineers and geologists This section presents those methods which can be employed with a minimum of special training equipment or cost More detailed methods capable of sampling to greater depths in more difficult soil conditions or that can simultaneously instal groundwater monitor wells usually require professional assistance These techniques are discussed more fully in the Manual for Ground water Sampling Procedures Collection of samples from near the soil surface can be accomplished with tools such as spades shovels and scoops With this type of readily available equipment the soil cover can be removed to the required depth then a stainless steel scoop can used to collect the sample An undisturbed sample can be collected from this excavation by employing a thin wall tube sampler This device is as the name implies a metal tube generally 2 5 to 7 5
71. with a safety gloved thumb or a rubber stopper 5 Carefully remove the capped tube from the drum and insert the uncapped end in the sample container Release the thumb or stopper on the tube and allow the sample container to fill to approximately 90 percent of its capacity 7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 if more volume is needed to fill the sample container Remove the tube from the sample container and replace the tube in the drum 9 Cap the sample container tightly with a Teflon lined cap and affix the sample identification tag 10 Break the glass sampling tube in such a way that all parts of it are discarded inside the drum Note see the initial discussion to this section for exceptions 3 18 Section 3 3 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 variations to this technique have been reported These include the incorporation of a small suction device i e pipette bulb to the top of the tube as well as the use of various tube sizes Some success has been reported with tubes that have been heated at one end then drawn to form a much smaller orifice This allows the use of larger diameter tubing therefore a greater volume of sample per attempt while reducing the material loss from the tube bottom normally associated with larger diameter tubes It should be noted that in some instances disposal of the tube by breaking it into the drum may interfere with eventual plans for the removal of its contents The use of this technique should
72. 01 on Chromasorb W GC Column Selected Retention Times 8 inch 1 percent TCEP on Chromasorb W W HP Compounds Successfully Monitored Using Tenax Sampling Protocols Literature Summary Volatile Organics Amenable to Collection by Tenax Sorbent Cartridges Approximate Retention Volumes at 38 C 100 F Organic Compounds Collected in Ambient Air Using Low Volume or High Volume Polyurethane Foam Samplers Revision 0 0 Revision 0 Section 1 1 Revision 1 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 1 0 NTRODUCTI ON 1 1 GENERAL Investigations at hazardous waste and environment threatening spill sites place more restrictive demands on personnel materials and methodologies than those usually found in routine environmental surveys As a result traditiona procedures and protocols used for the acquisition of environmental samples often fail to meet the rigors and demands required for many hazardous waste sampling applications Thus the collection of hazardous waste samples will frequently require specialized equipment and protocols either developed specifically for such uses or modified from preexisting materials and or techniques Some important considerations are Versatility Methods and materials must be suitable to a wide range of situations and applications because of the unknown nature of many hazardous waste investigations and environmental spill responses e Safety Hazardous wastes by definition are associated with both acute and chron
73. 1 American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Properties for Sampling Water In Annual Book of ASTM Standards Part 31 03370 76 Philadelphia PA 1981 American Society for Testing and Materials Thin Walled Tube Sampling of Soils In Annual Book of ASTM Standards Part 19 D 1587 74 Philadelphia PA 1981 Apperson C S R B Leidy R Epler and E Corter An Efficient Device for Collecting Soil Samples for Pesticide Residue Analysis Bull Environ Contain Toxicol 25 55 58 1980 Arthur D Little Inc 1979 EPA IERL RTP Procedures for Level 2 Sampling and Analysis of Organic Materials 600 7 79 033 U S Dept of Commerce 1979 Barborick A B R Sabey and A Klute Comparison of Various Methods of Sampling Soil Water for Determining lonic Salts Sodium and Calcium Content in Soil Columns Amer Journal of Soil Science 43 5 1979 6 Section 6 0 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 Batley E D Gardner Sampling and Storage of Natural Waters for Trace Metals Analysis Research 11 745 756 1977 Beach M and J S Beach Sample Acquisition The First Step in Water Quality Monitoring Prog Water Tech 9 516 75 77 1977 Eichenberger B J R Edwards K Y Clen and R Stevens A Case Study of Hazardous Wastes in Class 1 Landfills EPA 600 2 78 064 U S Environmental Protection Agency Washington D C 1978 Enverex Inc Handbook for Sampling and Sample Preservation of Water and Waste
74. 1 I 2sl aua 4u190J0u284381 spuodses 1 spuorsas 3 02 31941 4 29 where RF C Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 14 of 14 response factor concentration of the standard pg ml volume of standard injected ml response to the standard in integrated counts or measured linear dimensions Sample concentrations can then be estimated by where R RF R 1 RF x sample concentration pg ml response of sample peak in the same units as used for the standard volume of sample injected ml calculated response factor 4 30 Section 4 2 6 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 4 2 6 METHOD 1V 6 STAIN DETECTOR TUBE METHOD FOR SAMPLING GASEOUS COMPOUNDS Discussion A relatively simple method for determining concentrations of specific gaseous pollutants is through the use of stain detector tubes They are usually calibrated in ppm for easy interpretation and are either direct reading or referenced to a supplied concentration scale or color change chart The limiting factors in the application of this methodology are the small number of compounds for which detector tubes are available interfering agents and cross sensitivities short sampling time and the extremely small sample volume used Most detector tubes are species specific however some detect groups of compounds e g total hydrocarbons The detector tubes
75. 1 and Newark Rd Avondale PA 19311 215 268 3181 Bacharach Instrument Company 301 Alpha Drive Pittsburgh PA 15238 412 782 3500 Baird Atomic 125 Middlesex Turnpike Bedford MA 01730 617 276 6000 BarCad System Inc 0 Box 424 Concord MA 01742 617 969 0050 Beckman Instruments Inc Process Instrument Division 2500 Harbor Boulevard Fullerton CA 92634 Bendix Corporation Environmental and Process Instruments Division 0 Drawer 831 Ronceverte W 24970 304 647 4358 Cole Palmer 7425 North Oak Park Ave Chicago Illinois 60648 800 323 4340 p 3 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 Curtin Matheson Scientific Major Metropolitan Areas Dosimeter Corporation of America P 0 Box 42377 Cincinnati OH 45242 513 489 8100 DuPont Company Applied Technology Division Concord Plaza Clayton Bldg Wilmington DE 19898 302 772 5989 Eberline Instruments 0 Box 2108 Santa Fe NM 87501 505 471 3232 Energetic Science Six Skyline Drive Hawthorne NY 10532 Environmental Measurements Inc 215 Leidesdorff Street San Francisco CA 94111 415 398 7664 Fisher Scientific Major Metropolitan Areas Gas Measurement Instruments Ltd Inchinnan Estate Renf rewPA49RG 041 812 3211 GasTech Inc Johnson Instrument Division 331 Fairchild Drive Mountain View CA 94043 415 967 6794 General Metal Works Inc 8368 Bridgetown Road Village of Cleves OH 45002
76. 1 of 1 2 2 1 METHOD 11 1 SOIL SAMPLING WITH A SPADE AND SCOOP Discussion The simplest most direct method of collecting soil samples for subsequent analysis is with the use of a spade and scoop A normal lawn or garden spade can be utilized to remove the top cover of soil to the required depth and then a smaller stainless steel scoop can be used to collect the sampl e Uses This method can be used in most soil types but is limited somewhat to sampling the near surface Samples from depths greater than 50 cm become extremely labor intensive in most soil types Very accurate representative samples can be collected with this procedure depending on the care and precision demonstrated by the technician The use of a flat pointed mason trowel to cut a block of the desired soil will be of aid when undisturbed profiles are required A stainless steel scoop or lab spoon will suffice in most other applications Care should be exercised to avoid the use of devices plated with chrome or other materials Plating is particularly common with garden implements such as potting trowels Procedures for Use 1 Carefully remove the top layer of soil to the desired sample depth with a precleaned spade 2 Using a precleaned stainless steel scoop or trowel remove and discard a thin layer of soil from the area which comes in contact with the shovel 3 Transfer sample into an appropriate sample bottle with a stainless steel lab spoon or equivalent 4
77. 20 Acetone 20 7 1 2 4 Trichlorobenzene 21 1 2 3 5 orobenzene 21 Hexachl orobenzene 21 p Chl orophenol 21 2 4 6 Trichl orophenol 21 Diphenyl Oxide 21 o Phenyl phenol 21 Pentachl orophenol 21 Pentane 1 2 Methyl pentane 1 3 Methyl pentane 1 n Hexane 1 Heptane 1 Octane 7 Nonane 1 Propyl benzene 1 Tri methyl benzene 1 o Ethyl toluene 1 TABLE 4 7 liters gram of Tenax Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 6 of 15 APPROXI MATE RETENTION VOLUMES AT 38 C 100 F Ami nes Ethers Esters Ketones Aldehydes Alcohols Aromatics Hydrocarbons Hal ogenated Hydrocarbons dimethyl ami ne isobutyl amine t butyl amine di n butyl amine pyridine diethyl ether propylene oxide ethyl acetate methyl acrylate methyl methacrylate acetone methyl ethyl ketone methyl vinyl ketone acetophenone acetaldehyde benzaldehyde methanol n propanol allyl alcohol benzene toluene ethyl benzene n hexane n heptane 2 2 di methyl butane 2 4 di methyl pentane 4 pentane cyclohexane methyl chloride methyl bromide vinyl chloride 440 conti nued 4 38 Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 7 of 15 TABLE 4 7 continued methylene chloride 2 chloroform 8 carbon tetrachloride 8 1 2 dichloroethane 10 1 1 1 trichloroethane 6 tetrachloroethene 80 trichloroethene 20 1 chloro 2 methyl propene 6 3 chloro 2 methyl propene 7 1 2 dichloropropane
78. 433 vu 98 9uaLAu39040 u29439 99 u LAu19040 u284319 0 09 1 98 9piuo4qig euaLAu33 V 162 epiuoJqtq 4433 199 43 792 3utp LA d 0 St 01 2 172 0 1 9 Tt Z TST eueu3e040 u214 0 922 2 1 1 eueu38040 U214 2 6 9003183 1431405 LAuQaw S 281 auoyay LA3nqos 1 3 1 T 0 aueqday 9 9 12 4u39040 U21J 6 721 93 3 5 14423 L S2 L luy 433 56 141 9ua Au39040 U2141 8 99298 8 8 2 99 0 2 1 1 1 2 02 T TST 3 040 41 S ec ueJ4ngo4pAue438 2 89 ouo 14433 M TA a a oe ig ee deg See Spuodas punoduo Spuo2oeS punoduoj 3 0 2 0 4 03 37891 4 27 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 12 of 14 3 05 9 65 auoqey Auda LAu39N Utt 0uo2 v 0 9 aua 39 9 8 1 LAu19N tot auazuag 0 921 14433 9 0 403040 1 01 1403040 45 L 62 ueunzoupAyeuqaly 9 201 9uazueg L 62 AULA 0 66 azeqaoy LAULA 8 82 1 14433 1 86 03 6 12 9U0192y 2 16 ueungoupAyeuqal 6 L2 3 040 42141 9 v8 Qua L4u39040 U214 tte 3 3 LAU19W 6 18 4433 be 9ptJ40 u 2 6L
79. 5 percent Calculate flow rate and total sample volume at standard conditions as follows Pstd Nomenclature F flow rate at standard conditions liters min min Constant flow type pumps such as the DuPond P 4000 have the ability to maintain the flow rate with 5 percent at pressure drops as high as 25 inches of water For this reason it is unnecessary to place a calibrator sorbent cartridge in line as long as the expected pressure drop does not exceed that specified by the manufacturer 4 44 3 Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 13 of 15 f actual flow rate at calibration conditions liters min ft mi n T temperature of air during calibration K R pressure of air during calibration mm Hg in Hg Standard absolute temperature 298 K 537 R standard absolute pressure 760 mm Hg 29 92 in Hg Pho vapor pressure of water at T mm Hg in Hg Wien using the calibration configuration depicted in Figure 4 2 the flow maintenance feature of the pump can be checked by inducing a pressure drop across the system using the pressure drop valve and determining the subsequent flow rate with the bubble tube The maximum difference between the flow rate determined in step i and the flow rate measured at the maxi mum expected pressure drop should not exceed 5 percent Sampling Procedure Assemble sampling train Figure 4 3 The general procedure requires four trains
80. 6 of 6 b Removing Exposed Filter 1 Turn sampler on and allow to warm up at least 5 minutes 2 Check flow recorder chart for proper operation 3 Turn sampler off and record elapsed time in logbook and on the data sheet 4 Remove chart and place in envelope 5 Carefully loosen wing nuts and remove faceplate gasket 6 Remove the exposed filter by gently grasping the ends of the filter and lifting it from the screen Fold the filter lengthwise at the middle with the exposed side in f the collected sample is not centered on the filter fold the filter accordingly so that sample touches sample only 7 Place the filter in a glassine envelope and place glassine envelope with data sheet in a folder for return to sample bank 8 Visually inspect for signs of leakage damage etc to the sampler and repair if necessary Sources United States Environmental Protection Agency Appendix B Reference Method for the Determination of Suspended Particulate in the Atmosphere High Volume Method 40 CFR Part 50 November 25 1971 United States Environmental Protection Agency Proposed Changes to Ambient Measurement Methodology for Carbon Monoxide Particulate and Sulfur Dioxide 47 CFR 2341 January 15 1982 Section 4 3 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 4 3 5011 GASES AND VAPORS Monitoring of soil gases can often serve as a quick method of determining the extent of pollutant migration or establishing perimeters of a sit
81. 8 Scan suspected surfaces or areas When in doubt use most sensitive ranges first Read scale in mR hr or counts minutes Sources Department of Health and Human Services Bureau of Radiological Health Radiological Health Handbook USGPO 017 011 004309 5 7 U S Environmental Response Operations Technology Center Protection Agency Training Manual Cincinnati Ohio 5 8 Section 5 3 1 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 Hazardous Materials Incident National Training and Operational Section 6 0 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 SECTION 6 0 BI BLI OGRAPHY American Public Health Association Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater Fifteenth Edition Washington D C 1980 American Society for Testing and Materials Penetration Test and Split Barrel Sampling of Soils In Annual Book of ASTM Standards Part 19 D1586 67 Philadelphia PA 1981 American Society for Testing and Materials Recommended Practices for Sampling In Annual Book of ASTM Standards Part 26 01605 60 Philadelphia PA 1981 American Society for Testing and Materials Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings In Annual Book of ASTM Standards Part 19 D1452 80 Philadelphia PA 1981 American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Practice for Sampling Atmospheres to Collect Organic Compounds Activated Charcoal Adsorption Method In Annual Book of ASTM Standard Part 26 03686 78 Philadelphia PA 198
82. ASTES USING THE COMPOSITE LIQUID WASTE SAMPLER COLI WASA Discussion The COLI WASA is a much cited sampler designed to permit representative sampling of multiphase wastes from drums and other containerized wastes The sampler is commercially available or can be easily fabricated from a variety of materials including PVC glass or Teflon In its usual configuration it consists of a 152 cm by 4 cm inside diameter section of tubing with a neoprene stopper at one end attached by a rod running the length of the tube to a locking mechanism at the other end Manipulation of the locking mechanism opens and closes the sampler by raising and lowering the neoprene stopper A current recommended model of the COLIWASA is shown in Figure 3 5 however the design can be modified and or adapted somewhat to meet the needs of the sampler Uses The COLI WASA is primarily used to sample most containerized liquids The plastic COLIWASA is reported to be able to sample most containerized liquid wastes except for those containing ketones nitrobenzene dimethylforamide mesityloxide and tetrahydrofuran A glass COLI WASA is able to handle all wastes unable to be sampled with the plastic unit except strong alkali and hydrofluoric acid solution Due to the unknown nature of most containerized waste it would therefore be advisable to eliminate the use of PVC materials and use samplers composed of glass or Teflon The major drawbacks associated with using a COLI WA
83. Agency 1983 Milletari A F Sampling Industrial Wastewater to Help Meet Discharge Standards Water and Wastes Engineering 14 10 55 57 1977 6 2 Section 6 0 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Monsanto Corp Technical Manual for Process Sampling Strategies for Organic Materials EPA 2 76 122 1976 Peters J A M Tackett and C Eimutis Measurement of Fugitive Hydrocarbon Emissions from a Chemical Waste Disposal Site In National Conference on Management of Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites Washington D C 1981 Pellezzari E D Development of Method for Carcinogenic Vapor Analysis in Ambient Atmospheres EPA 650 2 74 121 1974 Pettyjohn W A W J Dunlop R Crosby and W J Keely Sampling Groundwater for Organic Contaminants Groundwater 19 2 1981 Pickens J F J A Cherry 6 E Grisak W R Merrit and B A Risto Multilevel Device for Groundwater Sampling and Piezometric Monitoring Groundwater 15 5 1977 Rhodes J W and D E Johnson Evaluation of Collection Media for Low Levels of Airborne Pesticides EPA 600 1 77 050 1980 Robertson J Organic Compounds Entering Ground Water from a Landfill National Environmental Research Center PB 237 969 1974 Schofield T Sampling Water and Wastewater Practical Aspects of Sample Collection Water Pollution Control 79 468 470 1980 Sullivan D A and J B Strauss Air Monitoring of a Hazardous Waste Site In National Conference on Manage
84. Check that a Teflon liner is present in the cap if required Secure the cap tightly The chemical preservation of solids is generally not recommended Refrigeration is usually the best approach supple mented by a minimal holding time For specific containerization and preservation requirements consult Appendix 5 Label the sample bottle with the appropriate sample tag Be sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Complete all chain of custody documents and record in the field log book 6 Decontaminate equipment after use and between sample locations For specific decontamination guidelines consult Appendix 2 4 Section 2 2 2 Revision 1 Page 1 of 3 2 2 2 METHOD Il 2 SUBSURFACE SOLID SAMPLING WITH AUGER AND THIN WALL TUBE SAMPLER Discussion This system consists of an auger bit a series of drill rods a handle and a thin wall tube corer see Figure 2 1 The auger bit is used to bore a hole to the desired sampling depth and then withdrawn The auger tip is then replaced with the tube corer lowered down the borehole and forced into the soil at the completion depth The corer is then withdrawn and the sample collected Alternately the sample can be recovered directly from the auger This technique however does not provide an undisturbed sample as would be collected with a thin tube sampler In situations where the soil is rocky it may not be possible to force
85. Collection and Analysis of Polynuclear Aromatic Compounds in Ambient Air J Air Poll Control 30 166 168 1980 Hunt G T N Pangaro G A Sotolongo Ambient Monitoring of Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons Employing High Volume Polyurethane Foam Samplers presented at the Eighth International Symposium on Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons Columbus OH October 26 28 1983 Keller C and T F Bidleman Collection of Vapor Phase Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons in Ambient Air Paper Presented Before the Division of Environmental Chemistry American Chemical Society Kansas City MO 1982 Stratton C L S Whitlock and J M Allan A Method for the Sampling and Analysis of Polychlorinated Biphenyls PCBs in Ambient Air EPA 600 4 78 048 August 1978 Rhoades J W and D E Johnson Evaluation of Collection Media for Low Levels of Airborne Pesticides EPA 600 1 77 050 1977 Billings W and T F Bidleman High Volume Collection of Chlorinated Hydrocarbons in Urban Air Using Three Solid Adsorbents Atmos Environ 17 2 1983 Lewis R G and M D Jackson Modification and Evaluation of a High Volume Air Sampler for Pesticides and Semivolatile Organic Chemicals Anal Chem 54 3 1982 Lewis R G Contractor Evaluation and Analysis of Air Samples from the Love Canal Area for Pesticies and Semi Volatile Chlorinated Organics HERL RTP NC 1980 Thrane K E and A Mikalsen High Volume Sampl
86. F Source Betz Handbook of Industrial Water Conditioning 1976 seventh edition Betz Laboratories Inc Trevose PA 6 3 Example Soi area samples Appendix G Revision 0 Page 4 of 4 samples are to be collected from a field 10 meters by 15 meters in Equipment and laboratory arrangements have been made to handle eight The area is divided into an imaginary 1 meter grid Each quadrant in the grid is assigned a number in a numerical order West to East North to South or left to right top to bottom Referring to the Random Number table it is arbitrarily decided to start at the first number in the third row then proceed down the column This would result in the selection of 43 as the first number followed by 24 62 85 56 77 17 and 63 as the eighth and final selection The grids corresponding to these numbers would then be sampled G 4 U GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1985 559 111 10754 Environmental Protection Information Agency Cincinnati OH 45268 Official Business Penalty for Private Use 300 Please make all necessary changes on the above label detach or copy and return to the address in the upper left hand corner you do not wish to receive these reports CHECK HERE detach or copy this cover and return to the address in the upper left hand corner EPA 600 5 85 076
87. FR Title 40 Sec 262 20 A hazardous waste manifest is a document shipping paper on which all hazardous waste is identified A copy of the manifest must accompany each shipment of waste from the point of pick up to the destination CFR Title 49 Sec 172 205 2 SHIPPERS RESPONSIBILITY Sec 172 200 a The shipper has the responsibility to properly prepare the shipping paper when offering a hazardous material for transport NOTE For shipments of hazardous waste the hazardous waste manifest is the only authorized documentation CFR Title 40 Sec 262 23 j HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTION Sec 172 202 The shipping description of a hazardous material on a shipping paper must Include the following information A Proper shipping Sec 172 101 or Sec 172 102 when authorized B The hazard class prescribed for the material in the same section See exceptions Sec 172 202 a 2 C The Identification number for the material preceded by UN or NA as appropriate and D Except for empty packagings the total quantity by weight volume or as otherwise appropriate of the hazardous materials covered by the description E Except as otherwise provided in the regulations the basic description in B and C above must be shown in sequence For example Acetone Flammable Liquid UNI090 F The total quantity of the material covered by one description must appeal te or after or both before after the basic descrip
88. G PLATE Source Reference 41 Drilling mechanism 4 70 Figure 4 9 Section 4 4 2 Procedures for Use 1 Revision 0 Page 3 of 4 Assemble the drill assembly as per Appendix B Equipment Availability and Fabrication Brush clear any loose rust or dirt to assure a leak free seal Seat assembly against the drum side Tighten mounting straps using portable packaging equipment Assure that all fittings are snug and needle valve is fully closed Deploy remote control cable to full extent and stand behind safety screen Activate drill After penetration is indicated by light on remote control unit approach container while monitoring internal drum pressure with pressure gauge on sampler Attach desired monitor instrument for container content characterization device listed in the ambient section can be employed Method IV 1 through IV 8 instrument can be attached by using an appropriate size Teflon tubing see Method IV 11 After sampling close needle valve Extra caution is necessary for highly pressurized containers as most menitors are designed to accept ambient pressure gases After proper quantification and or identification of the contained gas the safety officer should decide whether the gas can be vented or should be properly contained for later disposal The full assembly can be removed if the gas has been properly vented or disposed of otherwise the drill can be loosened from the bit a
89. I Radiation Survey Instruments 6 0 Bibliography Appendices Sample Containerization and Preservation o3 mo Equipment Availability and Fabrication Packing Marking Labeling and Shipping of Hazardous Material Samples Document Control Chain of Custody Procedures Decontamination Procedures Instrument Certification Applicable Tables Revision c c c lt gt FIGURES Types of material Augers and thin wall tube sampler Hand corer Gravity corers Ponar grab Sampling trier Grain thief Pond sampler Peristaltic pump for liquid sampling Peristaltic pump for liquid sampling modified Modified Kemmerer sampler Composite liquid waste sampler COLI WASA Sample drillers log Gas pressure displacement system Teflon bailer Calibration schematic for rotameter and needle valve combination Calibration configuration for constant flow samplers Tenax sampler PUF sampling train schematic viii Revision lt gt FIGURES continued Exploded view of typical high volume air sampler parts Assembled sampler and shelter Bar hole maker Gas sampling wel Drilling mechanism TABLES Compounds Shown Amenable to Field GC Analysis Selected Retention Times 8 inch 3 percent Diisodecyl Phthalate on Chromasorb W Selected Retention Times 8 inch 10 percent OV 1
90. L UYJ W 9 12 T T T 2439040142141 0 59 40 eue 6 81 9ue4u13 9 5 eH 6 81 3 E IS T T T aueyqaouo 42441 2 91 1 92 0143942433 043 33 1 92 9ue1daH Uv AULA 9 12 auapt LAULA 9 21 ETT u0a4j 8 61 auexay 9 21 2 91 u094j L II S EI auequad punoduo lt 9 3 0 2 0 dH M GYOSWWOYHD NO 4321 1439334 HONI 8 S3WIL 03123135 t 37891 4 28 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 13 of 14 0 0001 9utptaKd 0 0001 3 8 0 912 0 0001 4 13 8 80c auashys 0 0001 9 491 Z T I 3 0440 42141 0 0001 hd 9 S9T tAudy A yng 0 0001 15 6 291 eptuo4qiq 33 0 000L Z T T eueu38040 U2141 48 auazuag 16433 v v9v u zu g 4u13 69 9LL431U0395y 0 0SP auozay LAynqos L Auiew 69 900329 A3nqoS Ay aN 2 OVE N iouedoJd 2 19 0 725 914 1U0392V 6 tS 96 L4u33 05 43 9 95 49 43 LAu19WN 09 2 1 1 33 2 S 6b 9LLA3 Luo Ady 0 922 9pr401u21Q aua 4u13 9 87 01 9 202 91143100 Andy 0 St Ul 641 9u0393 14433 LAui9NW Vl 1
91. NSPORTATION BY WATER A SHIPPING PAPERS Sec 176 24 carrier may not transport a hazardous material by vesse unless the material is properly described on the shipping paper in the manner prescribed in Part 172 8 CERTIFICATE Sec 176 27 1 A carrier may not transport a hazardous material by vessel unless he has received a certificate prepared in accordance with Sec 172 204 2 In the case of an import or export shipment of hazardous materials which will not be transported by rail highway or air the shipper may on the bill of lading other shipping paper that the hazardous material is properly classed described marked packaged and labeled according to Part 172 or in accordance with the require ments of the IMCO Code See Sec 171 12 DANGEROUS CARGO MANIFEST Sec 176 30 The master of a vessel transporting hazardous materials or his authorized representative shall prepare a dangerous cargo manifest list or stowage plan eS document may not include a material which is not subject to the requirements of CFR Title 49 or the IMCO Code This document must be kept in a desig nated holder on or near the Vessel 5 bridge See 176 30 for details D EXEMPTIONS Sec 176 31 If a hazardous material is being transported by vessel under the authority of an exemption and a copy of the exemption is required to be on board the vessel it must be kept with the dangerous cargo manifest NOTE For additional details re
92. Operations Inc Appendix B Revision 0 Page 7 of 12 Lt d Appendix B Revision 0 Page 8 of 12 50 Wildco 301 Cass Street Saginaw 48602 517 799 8100 51 Yellow Springs Instrument Co Yellow Springs OH 45387 513 767 7241 B 8 Appendix B Revision 0 Page 9 of 12 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION Many of the instruments and devices listed previously can also be readily fabricated in house This usually affords considerable cost savings as well as allows for custom designs and alterations Bailers coliwasas and hand corers can be constructed from available stainless steel and teflon stock The diagrams and drawings which accompany their description in the text show nominal dimensions and construction materials Sizes can however altered to fit particular needs The sources cited with these drawings as well as the references at the end of the method comment further on their construction and use The device used in Method IV 13 Sampling of Headspace Gases in Sealed Vessels is not currently available through commercial sources The fabrication details are therefore included in this Appendix 8 9 11 Appendix B Revision 0 Page 10 of 12 Sealed Vessel Tapping Device Assembly Fabricate mounting plate Position Portalign on mounting plate drill 6 4 mm holes through Portalign base and mounting plate Tap holes for 7 14 mm thread in mounting plate Secure Portalign to mounting plate with 7 14 mm SAE bolts Thre
93. SA concern decontamination and costs The sampler is difficult if not impossible to decontaminate in the field and its high cost in relation to alternative procedures glass tubes make it an impractical throwaway item It still has applications however especially in instances where a true representation of a multiphase waste is absolutely necessary For this reason the procedure for its use is included Procedures for Use 1 Choose the material see Appendix to be used to fabricate the COLI WASA and assemble the sampler as shown in Figure 3 5 2 Make sure that the sampler is clean 3 Check to make sure the sampler is functioning properly Adjust the locking mechanism if necessary to make sure the neoprene rubber stopper provides a tight closure 4 Wear necessary protective clothing and gear and observe required sampling precautions 3 22 10 11 Sources Section 3 3 2 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Put the sampler in the open position by placing the stopper rod handle in the T position and pushing the rod down until the handle sits against the sampler s locking block Slowly lower the sampler into the liquid waste Lower the sampler at a rate that permits the levels of the liquid inside and outside the sampler tube to be about the same If the level of the liquid in the sample tube is lower than that outside the sampler the sampling rate is too fast and will result in a nonrepresentative sample When the sampler s
94. Sec 172 203 k NOTE For additional details see Sec 172 203 Exceptions OTHER REGULATED MATERIAL ORM A B C AND D 1 Shippim er requirements do ne apply to any material other than a hazardous waste ui or lois substance that IR An ORM A or C unless it n offered or intended for transportation by air or water when it is subject to the regulations pertaining to transportation by air or water as specified in Sec 172 101 Hazardous Materials Table or b An ORM D unless it is offered or intended for transportation by air C 14 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 15 of 23 MODAL REQUIREMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION NOTE In addition to the basic requirements for shipping papers additional information is listed for each mode TRANSPORTATION BY RAIL A SHIPPING PAPERS Sec 176 24 1 Except as provided in b of this section no person may accept for trans portation by rail any hazardous material which is subject to this subchapter unless he has received a shipping paper prepared in a manner specified in Sec 172 200 In addition the shipping paper must include a certificate if required by Sec 172 204 However no member of the train crew of a train the hazardous material is required to have a shippers certificate on the shipping paper in his possession if the original shipping paper containing the certificate is in the originating carriers possession 2 This subpart does not apply to materials classed
95. Subsurface Solid Sampling with Auger and Thin Wall Tube Sampler 2 3 Sludges and Sedi ments 2 3 1 Method 11 3 Collection of Sludge or Sediment Samples with a Scoop 2 3 2 Method 11 4 Sampling Sludge or Sediments with a Hand Corer 2 3 3 Method 11 5 Sampling Bottom Sludges or Sediments with a Gravity Corer 2 3 4 Method Il 6 Sampling Bottom Sludges or Sedi ments with a Ponar Grab 2 4 Bulk Materials 2 4 1 Method 11 7 Sampling of Bulk Material with a Scoop or Trier 2 4 2 Method 11 8 Sampling Bulk Materials with a Grain Thief 2 5 References 3 0 Liquids 3 1 General 3 2 Surface Waters 3 2 1 Method 111 1 Sampling Surface Waters Using a Dipper or Other Transfer Device 3 2 2 Method 111 2 Use of Pond Sampler for the Collection of Surface Water Samples 3 2 3 Method 111 3 Peristaltic Pump for Sampling Surface Water Bodies Revision ee a a CONTENTS continued Section 3 2 4 Method 111 4 Collection of Water Samples from Depth with a Kemmerer Bottle 3 3 Containerized Liquids 3 3 1 Method 111 5 Collection of Liquid Containerized Wastes Using Glass Tubes 3 3 2 Method 111 6 Sampling Containerized Wastes Using the Composite Liquid Waste Sampler Coli wasa 3 4 Groundwater 3 4 1 Method 111 7 Purging with a Peristaltic Pump 3 4 2 Method 111 8 Purging with a Gas Pressure Displacement System 3 4 3 Method 111 9 Sampling Monitor Wells with a Bucket Type Bailer 3 4 4 Method 111 10 Sampling Monitor Wells with a Peristaltic
96. TER PRESSURE DROP METER cc min or L min 10 50 in H20 PRESSURE DROP FLOW RATE VALVE METER ADJUSTMENT VALVE CONSTANT BUBBLE FLOW SAMPLER TUBE CALIBRATOR x CONSTANT FLOW AIR IN SAMPLING PUMP SOLUTION Figure 4 2 Calibration configuration for constant flow samplers Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 12 of 15 Measure ambient air temperature relative humidity and barometric pressure Determine water vapor pressure from tables d If battery test is available check battery Connect pump inlet to bubble tube flowmeter and start pump Allow pump to stablize before taking readings f Adjust to desired flow rate With the calibration configuration depicted in Figure 4 2 the flow rate can be adjusted to the target range with the magnehelic flow rate meter g If a flow rate meter is not available determine the initial flow rate using the bubble tube flow meter and record the time required for the bubble to travel between the appropriate volume markings on the tube Calculate the actual flow rate as follows Distance traveled ml Travel time min Once the flow rate of each sampler has been adjusted to the appropriate setting verify three times with the bubble tube and record the results Calculate the mean flow rate by summing the values of the three individual readings and dividing by three The deviation of the individual flow rates from the mean flow rate should not exceed
97. TIONAL MOISTURE TRAP s s OPTIONAL PYREX TUBE PREFILTER OR PACKING TENAX SORBENT PLUG TRIPOD ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT Figure 4 3 Tenax sampler 4 46 Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 15 of 15 d Allow pump to run for desired sampling time At the end of the sampling period observe rotameter level low flow indicator to determine if flow rate has been maintained Shut down sampling pump and record all pertinent information counter reading time barometric pressure relative humidity ambient temperature problems comments etc The final flow rate should not deviate from the initial flow rate by more than 5 percent f Remove sorbent cartridge use clean lint free gloves and place in culture tube Place cartridge in culture tube with the inlet facing up and mark accordingly on the outside of the culture tube Do not put any marking on Tenax cartridges p Place plugs of glass wool below and above the cartridge and tightly cap and label the culture tube Before proceeding with the packing the tube should be shaken to insure that the cartridge does not rattle inside the culture tube h Place sample identification tag on culture tube and fill out chai n of custody form Calculate total sample volume at standard conditions Vii F xt where F flowrate at standard conditions liters min ft min t total sample time min Sample gas volume at dry standard conditions dsl dscf
98. Though kits are available with sufficient tools to reach depths in excess of 7 meters soil structure impenetrable rock and water levels usually prevent reaching such completion depths Kits that include 1 meter of drill rod and the ability to order additional extensions will in practice prove satisfactory The need for soil information at greater depths will normally require professional assistance Consideration should be given to supplementing this information with groundwater monitoring since soil sampling can be conducted in conjunction with well completion For those wishing a more in depth discussion of soils and soil sampling refer to the Preparation of Soil Sampling Protocol Techniques and Strategies EPA 600 4 83 020 by Dr Benjamin J Mason prepared under con tract to the U S Environmental Protection Agency Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory Las Vegas August 1983 This report discusses in detail the factors that influence the selection of a particular sampling scheme or the use of a particular sampling method with a strong emphasis on statistical design and data analysis Another document Soil Sampling Quality Assurance User s Guide EPA 600 4 84 043 by Dr Delbert S Barth and Dr Benjamin J Mason prepared by the Environmental Research Center University of Nevada Las Vegas under a cooperative agreement with the Environmental Protection Agency May 1984 will also be helpful 2 3 Section 2 2 1 Revision 0 Page
99. a substance is the more extensive or thorough decontamination must be Whenever it is known or suspected that personnel can become contaminated with highly toxic or skin destructive Substances a full decontamination procedure should be followed If less hazardous materials are involved the procedure can be downgraded Amount of Contami nati on The amount of contamination on protective clothing is usually determined visually If it is badly contaminated a thorough decontamination is generally required Gross material remaining on the protective clothing for any extended period of time may degrade or permeate it This likelihood increases with higher air concentrations and greater amounts of liquid contamination Gross contamination also increases the probability of personnel contact Swipe tests may help determine the type and quantity of Surface contaminants Level of Protection The Level of Protection and specific pieces of clothing worn determine on a preliminary basis the layout of the decontamination line Each Level of Protection incorporates different problems in decontamination and doffing of the equipment For example decontamination of the harness straps and backpack assembly of the self contained breathing apparatus is difficult A butyl rubber apron worn over the harness makes decontamination easier Clothing variations and different Levels of Protection may require adding or deleting stations in the original decontamination proc
100. accomplished by extracting all or part of the filter and analyzing the extract accordingly i e atomic absorption ICP It should be noted that when trace metal analysis is desired it is extremely important to submit blank filters from each lot to the laboratory to determine background concentrations Modified high volume sampling techniques have also been used to efficiently collect certain organic compounds Stratton et al and Jackson and Lewis describe samplers modified to include a throat extension between the filter housing and blower that contains polyurethane foam sorbent This arrangement can also be used to trap polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon PNAs Additional sorbents or combinations can be used dependent upon specific collection requirements As with trace metal analysis it is important that blank filters and sorbents be submitted to the laboratory to determine the existence of background concentrations Uses The described procedures can be used to collect Total Suspended Particulate TSP matter in ambient air The collected material may be extracted and analyzed for trace metals or particulate related organics of low volatility In the latter case backup collection techniques PUF would be advisable Section 4 2 9 Revision 0 Page 2 of 6 eOSIT O N RETAINING RING 0 ADAPTER BOLT 2 Back GROMMET Ti cone 4 PLATE MOTOR go CORD i f
101. ad ball valve into mounting plate Thread Swagelok cross assembly onto ball valve Insert drill bit into chuck of drill Insert drill into Portalign assembly per manufacturer s instruction Pass drill bit through Teflon ferrule Place part 101 6 so that it stops drill bit travel approximately 10 mm below bottom of gasket material on mounting plate Mount entire assembly onto container using standard steel strap packaging equipment Place springs over Portalign guide rods Push springs down until good tension is obtained Secure with extra 101 6 and 101 8 parts Finger tighten compression nut containing Teflon ferrules Appendix B Revision 0 Page 11 of 12 DRUM DRILLING MECHANISM Parts L Mounting Plate 12 7 mm thick x 76 mm wide 127 mm long mild steel 19 1 mm x 3 2 mm deep channel on top of each side A 6 4 mm NPT hole in center of plate Bottom of mounting plate covered with 4 8 mm thick closed cell Neoprene gasket 2 Ball Valve 316 stainless steel 6 4 mm male NPT thread one end 6 4 mm female PNT other end 3 5 Cross 316 stainless steel three sides 6 4 mm male NPT 6 4 mm Swagelok side Assemble as Follows 0 50 psig pressure gauge 6 4 mm female NPT to one side of cross 8 316 stainless steel 6 4 mm male to 6 4 Swagelok needle valve mount opposite pressure gauge 6 4 mm Teflon ferrules into 6 4 mm Swagel ok fitting 4 Drill Bit 4 mm drill bit 140 mm long
102. age 5 of 14 The ability of a portable GC to provide unambiguous data may be limted It can however with proper use and data interpretation be used to detect and identify components of pockets of gaseous hydrocarbons inm depressions or confined spaces vapors in drums or other containers or in ambient air Procedures for Use The procedures presented in this section are intended to apply to any protable GC therefore detailed operating instructions must be obtained from the operating manual of the specific unit to be used Some procedures such as the preparation of standards can be used with any instrument and these are described here 1 Standard Preparation GC standards in air are prepared by using quantities of pure solvent which are small enough to vaporize completely in a 40 ml VOA vial at ambient pressure and temperature To do this 1 pl of the pure standard is injected through the septum into the 40 ml vial The resultant concentration is calculated by where compound concentration in amount injected in ul D density of the standard in g ml V volume of the vial and the air in it in liters For example 1 pl of toluene is injected into a clean 40 ml VOA vial and allowed to vaporize The resultant concentration is then calculated as 1 pl x 0 866 g ml 2 2 yglcc 0 4 1 This standard can then be used to prepare standards of lesser concentration by further dilut
103. ainers and drums present unique problems not associated with natural water bodies Containers of this sort are generally closed except for small access ports manways or hatches on the larger vessels or taps and bungs on smaller drums The physical size shape construction material and location of access will limit the types of equipment and methods of collection Wien liquids are contained in sealed vessels gas vapor pressures build up sludges settle out and density layerings develop The potential for explosive reactions or the release of noxious gases when containers are opened requires considerable safeguards The vessels should be opened with extreme caution Preliminary sampling of any headspace gases may be warranted Section 4 4 details procedures for sampling headspace gases As a minimum a preliminary check with an organic vapor analyzer may help determine needed levels of personnel protection and may be of aid in selecting a sampling method In most cases it is impossible to observe the contents of these sealed or partially sealed vessels Since some layering or stratification is likely in any solution left undisturbed over time a sample must be taken that represents the entire depth of the vessel Agitation to disrupt the layers and rehomogenize the sample is physically difficult and almost always undesirable In vessels greater than 1 meter in depth the method of choice is to slowly in known increments of length lower the suct
104. amples to standards should be made If retention time matches are noted another column is installed in the GC and standards and samples re run with subsequent comparisons made A retention time match on two different columns provide a fairly reliable identification however given the purpose of this screening the data should be labeled tentative or preliminary To save analytical time the following strategy has been used Since shorter GC columns result in shorter retention times at the cost of lower resolution between peaks a short column is used to do the first set of analyses and longer columns are used to verify compound identity and quantitation 5 Quantitation Following tentative identification of compounds in the sample a determination of quantitation can be made This can be based either on peak height or on the integrated area under the peak if an integrator is used First using the response to the standard calculate a response factor as Section 4 2 5 S penut3uo2 9 12 900393 14433 L u39W IS 4104040 LY 8 oI 9Uu0192y G 6t auazuag 8 61 40 aua_Ayy3 Sg 6t 932395 14433 8 61 3 LAu39N 9 8 6 81 Audy 6 St 9ue1daH 6 81 azeqaoy 14433 6 07 242439040 6 81 eue1daH 6 9 9U03122y Ut 9 14311003192y 6 9 91143 Lu0zady 141 6 9 30 T I aueyzOLeH 6 9 10402 1 LAu39N 2 91 33427499V L U19WN 0 9 9Ue4u13
105. analysis A major factor affecting retention time for instance is temperature of the GC column Since the field portable GC s described here are designed to work from battery power sufficient energy may not be available to maintain the column at constant temperature Variations in ambient temperature will then make retention times shift making identifications ambiguous Calibrations can be run at several column ambient temperatures to provide a family of curves thus reducing bias from temperature changes Another element contributing to ambiguous identification is complexity of the sample Compounds eluting with close or similar retention times may give false positive identifications or false high quantitations Quantitations are based on comparison of response of sample components to response of standards of known concentrations Again these values may be inaccurate due to uncontrollable variables such as environmental conditions or sample complexity Several detectors are available for as chromatography ranging from the very simple such as thermal conductivity to the more complex such as mass spectrometry Due to power restrictions and other restraints such as size 4 17 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 2 of 14 and reagent availability field instruments have been limited to about three or four detectors The most common are Flame lonization Detectors FID The FID will respond to most organic compounds as they form po
106. and slowly lowered to the bottom When tension is released on the lowering cable the latch releases and the lifting action of the cable on the lever system closes the clamshel see Figure 2 4 Uses Ponars are capable of sampling most types of sludges and sediments from silts to granular materials They are available in a Petite version with a 232 square centi meter sample area that is light enough to be operated without a winch or crane Penetration depths will usually not exceed several centi meters Grab samplers unlike the corers described in Method 11 5 are not capable of collecting undisturbed samples As a result material in the first centi meter of sludge cannot be separated from that at lower depths The sampling action of these devices causes agitation currents which may temporarily resuspend some settled solids This disturbance can be minimized by slowly lowering the sampler the last half meter and allowing a very slow contact with the bottom It is advisable however to only collect sludge or sediment samples after all overlying water samples have been obtained Procedures for Use 1 Attach a precleaned Ponar to the necessary length of sample line Solid braided 5 mm 3 16 inch nylon line is usually of sufficient strength however 20 mm 3 4 inch or greater nylon line allows for easier hand hoisting 2 Measure and mark the distance to bottom on the sample line A secondary mark 1 meter shallower will indicate proximit
107. ansporters see 263 20 e 7 PREPARATION OF HAZARDOUS WASTE FOR SHIPMENT 5262 30 Packaging Hazardous Waste The generator shipper has the responsibility for the classification and packaging of hazardous waste prior to offering for transportation The requirements for packaging will be found in the Department of Transportation Regulations CFR Title 49 Parts 172 173 178 and 179 B Labeling Requirements 5262 31 Prior to offering a hazardous waste for tr off site the generator shipper must label each package im accordance with 49 Part 172 Subpart E C Marking Requirements 262 32 Prior to offering hazardous waste for transportation off site the generator must 1 Mark each package of the hazardous waste and 2 Mark each container 110 gallons or less offered for transportation with the following words and information displayed in accordance with the requirements of CFR Title 69 Sec 172 304 HAZARDOUS WASTE Federal Law Prohibits Improper Disposal If found contact the nearest police or public safety authority or the United States Environmental Protection Agency Generator s Name and Addrees Manifest Document Number D Placarding Requirements 262 33 Prior to offering a hazardous waste for transporta lon off site e generator must 1 Placard the shipment or 2 Offer the initial transporter carrier the appropriate placards CFR Title 49 Part 172 Subpart F NOTE This handout is designed as a training aid onl
108. are must be given to those components in direct contact with contaminants such as tires and scoops Swipe tests should be utilized to measure effectiveness Sanitizing of Personnel Protective Equipment Respirators reusable protective clothing and other personal articles not only must be decontaminated before being reused but also sanitized The inside of masks and clothing becomes soiled due to exhalation body oils and perspiration The manufacturer s instructions should be used to sanitize the respirator mask If practical protective clothing should be machine washed after a thorough decontamination otherwise it must be cleaned by hand Persistent Contamination In some instances clothing and equipment will become contaminated with substances that cannot be removed by normal decontamination procedures A solvent may be used to remove such contamination from equipment if it does not destroy or degrade the protective material If persistent contamination is expected disposable garments should be used Testing for persistent contamination of protective clothing and appropriate decontamination must be done by qualified laboratory personnel Disposal of Contaminated Materials All materials and equipment used for decontamination must be disposed of properly Clothing tools buckets brushes and all other equipment that is contaminated must be secured in drums or other containers and labeled Clothing not completely decontaminated onsi
109. are ease of equipment decontamination or disposability Most equipment and supplies can be easily procured For example soft bristle scrub brushes or long handle brushes are used to remove contaminants Water in buckets or garden sprayers is used for rinsing Large galvanized wash tubs or stock tanks can hold wash and rinse solutions Children s wading pools can also be used Large plastic garbage cans or other similar containers lined with plastic bags store contaminated clothing and equipment Contaminated liquids can be stored temporarily in metal or plastic cans or drums Other gear includes paper or cloth towels for drying protective clothing and equipment E 6 Appendix E Revision 0 Page 7 of 11 Decontamination Solution Personnel protective equipment sampling tools and other equipment are usually decontaminated by scrubbing with detergent water using a soft bristle brush followed by rinsing with copious amounts of water While this process may not be fully effective in removing some contaminants or in a few cases contaminants may react with water it is a relatively safe option compared with using a chemical decontaminating solution Using chemicals requires that the contaminant be identified A decon chemical is then needed that will change the contaminant into a less harmful substance Especially trouble some are unknown substances or mixtures from a variety of known or unknown substances The appropriate decontamination solution
110. ash and rinse at least once all the personnel protective equipment worn This is done in combination with a sequential doffing of equipment starting at the first station with the most heavily contaminated item and progressing to the last station with the least contaminated article Each piece of clothing or operation requires a separate station Figure E 1 diagrams a contamination control program showing the layout of the contamination reduction zone E 2 Appendix E Revision 0 Page 3 of 11 gt EXCLUSION DECONTAMINATION ZONE AREA EE M M manne CONTAMINATION REDUCTION ZONE lt gee 9 c d dicus ORESSOUT REDRESS AREA i SUPPORT d ZONE ENTRY PATH Figure E 1 Contamination reduction zone layout 3 Appendix E Revision 0 Page 4 of 11 The spread of contaminants during the washing doffing process is further reduced by separating each decontamination station by a minimum of 3 feet Ideally contamination should decrease as a person moves from one station to another farther along the line While planning site operations methods should be developed to prevent the contamination of people and equipment For example using remote sampling techniques not opening containers by hand bagging monitoring instruments using drum grapplers watering down dusty areas and not walking throug
111. aste Sites FIT Project FIT Operation and Field Manual 1982 Barker N J and R C Levenson A Portable Photoionization GC for Direct Air Analysis American Laboratory December 1980 Linenberg A Automated On Site G C Measurements of Vapors In the Atmopshere Sentex Marketing Material Ridgefield New Jersey May 1983 Schlitt H H Knoeppel Versino Peel H Schanenburg and H Vissers Organics in Air Sampling and Identification In Sampling and Analysis of Toxic Organics in the Atmosphere ASTM STP 7121 American Society for Testing and Materials Philadelphia Pennsylvania 1980 pp 22 35 McMillan C R J Brooks D S West N F Hodgson and J D Mulik Development of a Portable Multiple Sorbent Ambient Air Sampler In National Symposium on Monitoring Hazardous Organic Pollutants in Air Raleigh N C April 28 to May 1 1981 Gallant F J W King P L Levins and J F Pucewicz Characterization of Sorbent Resins for Use in Environmental Sampling 600 7 78 054 March 1978 Pucewicz J F J C Harris and P 1 Levins Further Characterization of Sorbents for Environmental Sampling EPA 600 7 79 216 September 1979 U S Environmental Protection Agency Selection and Evaluation of Sorbent Resins for the Collection of Organic Compounds EPA 600 7 78 054 March 1978 4 73 14 15 21 23 24 Section 4 5 Revision 0 Page 2 of 4 GCA Corporation Guidelines for A
112. ation such as original test date information and type of material which may be required can be found in Parts 178 and 179 This publication does not contain all the marking requirements It is designed as a guide only For details for all markings consult Code of Federal Regulations Title 49 Parts 100 199 This publication may be reproduced without special permission from this office Department of Transportation Research and Special Programs Administration Materials Transportation Bureau Office of Operation and Enforcement Information Services Division DMT 11 Washington D C 20590 Revised September 1981 C 23 Appendix D Revision 0 Page 1 of 11 APPENDIX D DOCUMENT CONTROL CHAI N OF CUSTODY PROCEDURES 0 Appendix D Revision 0 Page 2 of 11 GENERAL Adherence to strict document control and chain of custody procedures is extremely important especially in relation to surveys at hazardous waste sites The legal implications alone demand that accountability be given an utmost priority The basic aspects of document control and chain of custody have therefore been included in this section For additional information the following publication from which this section was developed should be consulted NEIC Policies and Procedures Manual EPA 330 78 001R 1978 revised December 1981 Section DOCUMENT CONTROL The purpose of document control is to assure all project documents will be accounted for
113. ations that will convert the percent LEL based on methane read by the unit to a percent LEL for another combustible gas can usually be found in the operating manual Many units also have alarm systems which can be adjusted for various LEL s and several are available that incorporate oxygen analyzers Uses In general combustible gas detectors are used to determine the potential for combustion or explosion of unknown atmospheres These instruments in combination with oxygen detectors and radiation survey instrumentation should be the first monitors used when entering a hazardous area In this sense they provide a general indication of the degree of immediate hazard to personnel and can be used to assist the safety officer in making decisions on levels of protection required at the site However they provide little or no information about the presence of compounds hazardous or toxic at trace level concentrations Procedure for Use Li Make sure instrument is clean and serviceable especially sample lines and detector surfaces 2 Check battery charge level If in doubt charge battery as described in operating manual Some units have charge level meters while others have only low charge alarms 3 Turn unit to ON position and allow instrument sufficient warmup ti me 4 Verify that sample pump is operable if so equipped when analyzer is ON 5 With the intake assembly in combustible gas free ambient air zero the meter by rotating
114. be calibrated to the type and intensity of radiation desired to be measured in milliroentgens hr or roentgens hr Proportional Counter Instruments of this type derive their name due to their operation in the proportional region of the gas ionization detector response curve Instrument probes have an extremely thin window that allows alpha particles to enter and as such are used extensively for this purpose by adjusting instrument operating parameters to discriminate against beta and gamma radiation The meter is read in counts per minute and usually has several sensitivity 5 5 Section 5 3 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 scales It should be noted that due to the nature of alpha particles it is important to hold the probe as close as possible to though not in contact with the surface being monitored The window of the proportional counter is delicate in construction therefore requires care when using as a field instrument Geiger Mueller Counter These instruments operate principally in the same manner as ionization chambers except that secondary electrons are formed allowing for greater sensitivity The chambers are filled with an inert gas such as argon helium or neon below atmospheric pressure and a quenching gas which functions to control the secondary electron formation These instruments are very sensitive and are commonly used to detect low level gamma and or beta radiation Meters are read in counts minute or milliroentgens hour Th
115. be entered after the hazard class in the basic description NAME OF SHIPPER A shipping paper for a shipment by water must contain the name of the shi pper ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENTS Sec 172 203 ALL MODES Exemptions Each shipping paper issued in connection with shipment made under an exemptiom must bear the notation DOT E followed by the exemption number assigned Example DOT E 4648 and so located that the exemption number is clearly associated with the description to which the exemption applies Limited Quantities Descriptions for materials defined as Limited Quantities must include the words Limited Quantities or Ltd Qty following the basic description Hazardous Substances 1 If the proper shipping name for a mixture or solution that is a hazardous substance does not identify the constituents making it a hazardous substance the name or names of such constituents shall he entered in association with the basic description 2 The letters RQ di EAM Quantity shall be entered on the LEM pene either before or after the basic description required by Sec 172 202 for each hazardous substance See definition 171 8 Example RQ Cresol Corrosive Material NA2076 or Adipic Acid ORM E NA9077 RQ Radioactive Materials For additional description for radioactive materials refer to Sec 172 203 d Empty Packagings 1 Except for a tank car or any prn that still contains a hazardous subs
116. be taken to prevent contamination of sampling and monitoring equipment Sampling devices become contaminated but monitoring instruments unless they are splashed usually do not Once contaminated instruments are difficult to clean without damaging them Any delicate instrument which cannot be decontaminated easily should be protected while it is being used It should be bagged and the bag taped and secured around the instrument Openings are made in the bag for sampling intake E 9 Appendix e Revision 0 Page 10 of 11 Decontamination Procedures Sampling Devices Sampling devices required special cleaning Decontamination procedures including solution and solvent selection must be developed in conjunction with the designated analytical laboratory Tools Wooden tools are difficult to decontaminate because they absorb chemicals They should be kept on site and handled only by protected workers At the end of the response wooden tools should be discarded For decontaminating other tools consult with the analytical laboratory and the site safety officer Heavy Equipment Bulldozers trucks backhoes bulking chambers and other heavy equipment are difficult to decontaminate The method generally used is to wash them with water under high pressure and or to scrub accessible parts with detergent water solution under pressure if possible In some cases shovels scoops and lifts have been sandblasted or steam cleaned Particular c
117. ble contamination on workers e Type of contaminant and associated respiratory and skin hazards e Total vapor gas concentrations in the CRC e Particulate and specific inorganic or organic vapors in the CRC a Results of swipe tests 9 The presence or suspected presence of highly toxic or skin destructive materials Level C Use Level C includes a full face canister type air purifying respirator hard hat with face shield if splash is a problem chemical resistant boots and gloves and protective clothing The body covering recommended is chemical resistant overalls with an apron or chemical resistant overalls and jacket A face shield is recommended to protect against splashes because respirators alone may not provide this protection The respirator should have a canister approved for filtering any specific known contaminants such as ammonia organic vapors acid gases and particulate Level B Use In situations where site workers may be contaminated with unknowns highly volatile liquids or highly toxic materials decontamination workers should wear Level B protection Level B protection includes SCBA hard hat with face shield chemical resistant gloves and protective covering The clothing suggested is chemical resistant overalls jacket and a rubber apron The rubber apron protects the SCBA harness assembly and regulatory from becoming contami nated DECONTAMINATION OF EQUI PMENT Insofar as possible measures should
118. both sealed and unsealed containers of sizes varying from drums to large tanks Some overlap may occur between these two sections when in doubt both sections should be consulted The groundwater section will be concerned with obtaining samples from subsurface waters but will not include methods for well construction Section 3 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 3 2 SURFACE WATERS The choice of sample locations in surface waters is an important consideration which must addressed prior to sample acquisition since it will often effect the selection of sampling equipment Selection of representative locations will depend on many factors including stream dimensions shape flow rate velocity imputs and discharges The USGS publishes the national Handbook of Recommended Methods for Water Data Acquisition which addresses this problem in detail in addition to several other concepts including flow measurement Generally the selection of sample locations will be detailed in the sampling plan however familiarity with the concepts in the USGS Handbook wil assist the samplers in accommodating in field adjustments Most often depth integrated and or cross sectional composite samples are preferable to single point grabs In practice safe access and handling as well as other physical limitations will be influential factors during sample acquisition at hazardous waste contaminated sites Samples from shallow depths can be readily collected by merely submerg
119. c acid 504 ACS Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Acidify sample with conc sulfuric acid to a pHof 2 0 or less Store samples at 4 C All samples must be analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control Do not store samples containing low concentrations of phosphorus in plastic bottles because phosphate may be adsorbed onto the walls of the bottles Rinse all glass containers with hot dilute HCI then rinse several times in distilled water Never use commercial detergents containing phosphate for cleansing glassware used in phosphate analyses Appendix A Revision 0 Page 39 of 52 Radioactivity Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Conc nitric acid HNO3 ACS Sample Collection Preservation and Handling e Acidify samples with conc nitric acid to a pH of 2 0 or less e All samples must be analyzed within 6 months of collection Quality Control 9 The principles of representative sampling of water and wastewater apply to sampling for radioactivity examinations When radioactive industrial wastes or comparable materials are sampled consideration should be given to the deposition of radioactivity on the walls and surfaces of glassware plastic containers and equipment Because a radioactive element is often present in submicrogram quantities a significant fraction of it may be readily lost by adsorption on the surface of containers or glassware used in the examinat
120. can be costly however due to the potential number of samples that could be generated for subsequent analysis Time and cost constraints may therefore dictate a compromise collection of fewer samples location which may unfortunately jeopardize the quality of the resultant data It is therefore recommended that as much background information concerning suspected compounds and approximate concentrations be collected as possible before deciding on a compromised approach It is also recommended that at a minimum the delineated procedure be adhered to for undefined situations Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 3 of 15 Uses The method outlined below has been successfully used for quantitative analysis of the compounds listed in Table 4 5 in ambient air and is based on procedures used successfully for qualitative and quantitative analysis during several programs A brief review of the literature reveals that a number of additional compounds Table 4 6 have been analyzed either qualitatively or quantitatively using modifications of the procedure described herein Other additional compounds may be amenable to the method and to aid in determining both applicability and appropriate sampling volumes a list of retention volumes for the described sorbent tube has been included as Table 4 7 It should be noted however that since many of the compounds included in these lists have not been analyzed using this specific method testing or further revi
121. cedures would also suffice for Shipping any other samples classified below flammable liquids in the DOT classification table For samples containing unknown material other categories listed below flammable liquids solids on the table are generally not considered because eliminating other substances as flammable liquids requires flashpoint testing which may be impractical and possibly dangerous at a site Thus unless the sample is known to consist of material listed below flammable liquid on the table it is considered a flammable liquid or solid and shipped as such PROCEDURES SAMPLES CLASSIFIED AS FLAMMABLE LIQUID OR SOLID The following procedure is designed to meet the requirements for a limited quantity exclusion for shipment of flammable liquids and solids as set forth in parts 173 118 and 173 153 of 49 CFR By meeting these requirements the DOT constraints on packaging are greatly reduced Packaging according to the limited quantity exclusion requires notification on the shipping papers Packaging 1 Collect sample in a glass container 16 ounces or less with a nonmetallic teflon lined screw cap To prevent leakage fil container no more than 90 percent full at 130 F If an air space in the sample container would affect sample integrity place that container within a second container to meet 90 percent requirement 2 Complete sample identification tag and attach securely to sample container j Seal container and place in
122. ces and wastes In particular part 172 402 h of 49 CFR is intended to cover shipment of samples of unknown materials destined for laboratory analysis ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLES VERSUS HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SAMPLES Samples collected at an incident should be classified as either environmental or hazardous material or waste samples In general environmental samples are collected offsite for example from streams ponds or wells and are not expected to be grossly contaminated with high levels of hazardous materials Onsite samples for example soil water and materials from drums or bulk storage tanks obviously contaminated ponds lagoons pools and leachates from hazardous waste sites are considered hazardous A distinction must be made between the two types of samples in order to e Determine appropriate procedures for transportation of samples If there is any doubt a sample should be considered hazardous and shipped accordi ngl y e Protect the health and safety of laboratory personnel receiving the samples Special precautions are used at laboratories when samples other than environmental samples are received The following section describes the packaging labeling and shipping requirements for these two sample types Specific DOT regulations for hazardous materials shipping papers and general marking requirements are presented as Attachments C 1 and C 2 ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLES Environmental samples must be packaged and shipped accor
123. ched or depleted atmospheres If this condition is encountered or suspected personnel should evacuate the area Specially designed units are available for operation in such atmospheres An oxygen detector should always be used in conjunction with explosimeters Accurate data depends on regular calibration and battery chargi ng See operating manual More than any other factor effective utilization of unit requires operator with full understanding of operating principles and procedures for the specific instrument in use 4 10 Section 4 2 2 Revision 0 Page 4 of 4 Sources Edmont Model 60 400 Combustible Gas Oxygen Monitor Instruction Manual Manufactured by Energetic Science Elmsford NY 10523 U S Environmental Protection Agency Hazardous Materials Incident Response Operators Training Manual National Training and Operational Training Center Cincinnati Ohio Section 4 2 3 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 4 2 3 METHOD IV 3 MONITORING ORGANIC VAPORS USING A PORTABLE FLAME IONIZATION DETECTOR Discussion A flame ionization detector FID will respond to most organic vapors as they form positively charged ions when combusted in a hydrogen flame The magnitude of the response is a function of the detector sensitivity and the ionization properties of the particular compound as well as its concentration As a result this signal must be compared to that generated by calibration with a known concentration of a standard gas
124. comes necessary to initiate custody procedures from collection media preparation on as the sorbent itself becomes part of the sample after collection is complete Laboratories providing QC samples must also initiate a custody record The use of a customized record sheet such as the one shown in Figure D 2 fulfills these requirements by providing a convenient format for recording pertinent information The custody records are used for a packaged lot of samples more than one sample will usually be recorded on one form than one custody record Sheet may be used for one package if necessary Their purpose is to document the transfer of a group of samples traveling together when the group of samples changes a new custody record is initiated The original of the custody record always travels with the samples the initiator of the record keeps the copy When custody of the same group of samples changes hands several times some people will not have a copy of the custody record This is acceptable as long as the original custody record shows that each person who had received custody has properly relinquished it In general the following procedures should be followed when using the custody record sheets e The originator fills in all requested information from the sample tags except in the case of air collection media and external QC samples which will be accompanied by custody forms from the originating facility e The person receiving cu
125. consumption All electrically powered equipment should be checked for 3 29 Section 3 4 Revision 0 Page 6 of 7 electrical safety certification UL FM NFPA NEC Appendix F discusses the various certifications in detail Three basic designs are currently available Eductors A pump is used to circulate water through a venturi the resultant pressure drop across the venturi is used to draw sample into the recirculating stream A split stream is drawn off the recirculating stream equal to the flow at the intake These systems require priming water and must be run long enough to insure complete removal of the priming water from the recirculation loop They readily fit into a 2 inch diameter well and will recover samples from as deep as 100 ft or 50 ft in a 1 1 2 inch ID well Submersible Motor A small submersible electric motor is used to drive a common stator rotor pump They will fit inside a 2 inch ID well and operate at depths to approximately 150 ft The discharge flow varies with depth from 1 2 gpm at 10 ft to 0 6 gpm at 125 ft Bladder Compression A flexible bladder with check valve at either end is suspended inside a rigid chamber Hydrostatic pressure forces water into the bladder The chamber is then pressurized which squeezes the bladder and forces the water out the other check valve and into the discharge tubing This cycle is then repeated until the sample is recovered The pump is operated by a compressed a
126. ctives of the program For further details on this subject please refer to Volume Section 6 of this series Quality Assurance Quality Control The adherence to a proper Quality Assurance Quality Control plan is essential for a successful sampling effort The two major concerns of a QA QC plan are quality assurance samples and document control chain of custody Quality Assurance Samples Quality assurance samples must be collected at any time legal action is anticipated It is recommended that quality assurance samples be collected in all sampling surveys in order to know the quality of data collected These additional samples are essential to any quality control aspects of the project and may also assist in reducing costs associated with resampling brought about by container breakage errors in the analytical procedure and data confirma tion The following is a list of the types of quality assurance samples required Sample Blanks Sample blanks are samples of deionized distilled water rinses of collection devices or containers sampling media e g sorbent etc that are handled in the same manner as the sample and subsequently analyzed to identify possible sources of contamination during collection preservation handling or transport Duplicates Duplicates are essentially identical samples collected at the same time in the same way and contained preserved and transported in the same manner These samples are of
127. cts Co name of at least two components must be identified 1420 Rue De La Main Nice France Corrosive Liquid N O S Phosphoric Acid RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS 172 310 l Containers weighing over 110 pounds gross weight must be marked on the container Fasie Reccecuve T Must be marked TYPE A or B as aos required in letters at least 1 2 high 3 For export the letters USA must follow the specification markings or package certification OTHER REGULATED MATERIALS ORM S 5172 316 ORM materials must be designated immediately following or below the proper shipping name marking within a rectangular border approxi mately 1 4 inch larger on each side of the designation The appropriate designation must be one of the following 1 ORM A 5 ORM D 2 ORM B KEEP DRY 6 3 7 4 NOTE These markings serve as the certifica tion by the shipper that the material is prop erly described classed packaged marked and labeled when appropriate and in proper con dition for transportation Use of this type of certification does not preclude the requirement for a certificate on the shipping paper 172 316 c EXAMPLE AUTHORIZED CONTAINERS IN OUTSIDE CONTAINERS When a DOT specification container is required for a hazardous material and that container is overpacked in another container meeting the requirements of 173 21 a
128. d This signal is amplified and conditioned and then sent to the output display To minimize adsorption of various sample gases the ion chamber is usually made of an inert fluorocarbon material The sample line is kept as short as possible and a rapid flow of sample gas is maintained through the ion chamber volume Uses The portable photoionization detector is useful as a general survey instrument at waste sites and hazardous material spills As such it is similar to an FID in application however its capabilities are somewhat broader in that it can detect certain inorganic vapors Conversely the PID is unable to respond to certain low molecular weight hydrocarbons e g methane and ethane that are readily detected by FID In addition certain toxic gases and vapors e g carbon tetrachloride HCN have high ionization potentials and cannot detected with a PID 4 15 Section 4 2 4 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 Procedure for Use The procedural steps delineated herein are intentionally general The operating manual for the unit being used should be consulted for specific instructions Li Check battery charge level If in doubt charge battery as described in manual 2 Turn unit on Verification of UV lamp operation can be made by looking into sensor for purple glow of the lamp 3 Perform zero and calibration procedure as described in operating manual Calibration for specific compounds can be performed so that instrument re
129. d and built enclosure Within it any flames or hot gases are cooled prior to exiting into the ambient flammable atmosphere so that the explosion does not spread into the environment Intrinsically Safe Reduce the potential for arcing among Components by encasing themin a solid insulating material Also reducing the instrument s operational current and voltage below the energy level necessary for ignition of the flammable atmosphere provides equal protection An intrinsically safe device as defined by the National Electrical Code is incapable of releasing sufficient electrical or thermal energy under normal or abnormal conditions to cause ignition of a specific hazardous atmospheric mixture in its most easily ignited concentration Abnormal conditions shall include accidental damage to any wiring failure of electrical components application of over voltage adjustment and maintenance operations and other similar conditions e Purged Buffer the arcing or flame producing device from the flammable atmosphere with an inert gas In a pressurized or purged system a steady stream of for example nitrogen or helium is passed by the potential arcing device keeping the flammable atmosphere from the ignition source This type of control however does not satisfactorily control analytical devices that use a flame or heat for analysis such as a combustible gas indicator CGI or gas chromatography GC CERTI FI CATI ON Nati
130. d hang sampler on a tripod music stand or similar device To insure stability in wind gusts weighting of these devices or some method of anchoring is advisable The use of wooden or other nonsparking stakes can be used but experience has shown these to be less convenient and often more work than weighted stands b Record all initial information time counter reading cartridge number pump number sampler blank number barometric pressure ambient temperature relative humidity etc bs Start pump and observe system to determine if appropriate flow rate is being maintained For systems utilizing rotameters the calibrated rotameter setting should be maintained during the 4 52 Section 4 2 8 Revision 0 Page 6 of 7 3 PARTICULATE FILTER OPTIONAL PUMP MOISTURE TRAP OPTIONAL PYREX TUBE PREFILTER OR PACKING POLYURETHANE FOAM SORBENT PLUG TRIPOO ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT Figure 4 4 PUF sampling train schematic 4 53 Section 4 2 8 Revision 0 Page 7 of 7 entire run and should be monitored regularly Any adjustments to the rotameter are made by opening or closing the needle valve and should be noted in the field log Most constant flow sampling pumps have low flow indicators and or an automatic shut off feature at low flow conditions These should be initially observed and periodically monitored during the course of sampling d Allow pump to run for desired sampling time At end of samp
131. d seal better than the spring activated Eckman dredges especially in granular substrates In many instances sediments and sludges can be collected with a peristaltic pump as described in Method 111 3 This method is limited to slurried samples less than approximately 20 percent solid The weight of the material will also greatly reduce the lift capacity of the pump however it may still be useful in extending the reach of the sampler laterally toward the center of a vessel In slurries not fully agitated a bias may also be introduced toward the liquid portion of the material Sediments can be collected in much the same manner as described above for sludges however a number of additional factors may be considered Streams lakes and impoundments for instance will likely demonstrate significant variations in sediment composition with respect to distance from inflows discharges or other disturbances It is important therefore to document exact sampling location by means of triangulation with stable references on the banks of the stream or lake In addition the presence of rocks debris and organic material may complicate sampling and preclude the use of or require modification to some devices Sampling of sediments should therefore be conducted to reflect these and other variants Section2 3 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 2 3 1 METHOD 11 3 COLLECTION OF SLUDGE OR SEDIMENT SAMPLES WITH A SCOOP Discussion Sludge and sediment samples are c
132. d to fit sample bottles Caps must be lined with Teflon Aluminum foil may be substituted if sample is not corrosive Compositing equipment Automatic or manual compositing system Must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 1000 ml Sample containers must be kept refrigerated during sampling No plastic or rubber tubing other than Teflon may be used in the system Sample Collection Preservation and Handling e Grab samples must be collected in glass containers Conventional sampling practices should be followed except that the bottle must not be prerinsed with sample before collection Composite samples should be collected in refrigerated glass containers Automatic sampling equipment must be free of Tygon and other potential sources of contamination e The sample must be iced or refrigerated from the time of collection until extraction e All samples must be extracted within 7 days and completely analyzed within 30 days of collection Quality Control e Standard quality assurance practices should be used with this method Appendix A Revision 0 Page 32 of 52 Glassware must be scrupulously clean Clean all glassware as soon as possible after use by rinsing with the last solvent used This should be followed by detergent washing in hot water Rinse with tap water distilled water acetone and finally pesticide quality hexane Heavily contaminated glassware may require treatment in a muffle furnac
133. d to keep the tape taut and lower it into the center of the well condensate on the casing wall may prematurely wet the tape Listen for a hallow plopping sound when the weight reaches water Then lower the tape very slowly for at least another 15 cm preferably to an even increment Next carefully withdraw the tape from the well determine water depth by subtracting the wetted length of tape from the total length of tape in the well In small diameter wells the volume of the weight may cause the water to rise by displacement In general the use of indicating paste or chalk should be discouraged although they may not present a significant problem if water samples are not collected As with all depth measurement devices thoroughly clean the wetted section of the tape and the weight before reuse to avoid cross contamination 3 27 Section 3 4 Revision 0 Page 4 of 7 The metal tape and popper is another simple and reliable method for measuring depth to water in wells more than 3 8 cm 1 5 in in diameter The popper is a metal cylinder with a concave undersurface fastened to the end of the metal tape Raise and drop the popper until it hits the water surface and makes a distinct popping sound Adjust the tape length so that the popper just hits the water surface Read the depth to water from the tape measure To obtain a representative sample of the groundwater it must be understood that the composition of the water within the well casing and
134. d transported according to the following requirements e If the substance in the sample is known or can be identified package mark label and ship according to the specific instructions for that material if it is listed in the DOT Hazardous Materials Table 49 CFR 172 101 e For samples of hazardous materials of unknown content part 172 402 of 49 CFR allows the designation of hazard class based on the shipper s knowledge of the material and selection of the appropriate hazard class from part 173 2 see Table 1 The correct shipping classification for an unknown sample is selected through a process of elimination utilizing the DOT classification system Table C 1 Unless known or demonstrated otherwise through the use of radiation survey instruments the sample is considered radioactive and appropriate shipping regulations for radioactive material followed If radioactive material is eliminated the sample is consideredto contain Poison A materials Table C 2 the next classification onthe list DOT defines Poison A as extremely dangerous poisonous gases orliquids of such a nature that a very small amount of gas or vapor of the liquid mixed with air is dangerous to life C 3 13 14 15 TABLE C 1 Category General Radioactive Material Poison A Flammable Gas Nonflammable Gas Flammable Liquid Oxidizer Flammable Solid Corrosive Material Liquid Poison B Corrosive Material Solid Irritating Mate
135. ding to the following procedures Packaging Environmental samples may be packaged following the procedures outlined later for samples classified as flammable liquids or flammable solids but the requirements for marking labeling and shipping papers do not apply Environmental samples may also be packaged without being placed inside metal cans as required for flammable liquids or solids e Place sample container properly identified and with a sealed lid in a polyethylene bag and seal bag C 2 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 3 of 23 e Place sample in a fiberboard container or metal picnic cooler which has been lined with a large polyethylene bag Pack with enough noncombustible absorbent cushioning material to minimize the possibility of the container breaking e Seal large bag Seal or close outside container Marking Labelin Sample containers must have a completed sample identification tag and the outside container must be marked Environmental Sample The appropriate side of the container must be marked This End Up and arrows placed accordingly No DOT marking or labeling are required Shipping Papers No DOT shipping papers are required Transportation There are no DOT restrictions on mode of transportation RATIONALE HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SAMPLES Samples not determined to be environmental samples or samples known or expected to contain hazardous materials must be considered hazardous substance Samples an
136. e and the type and stir of containers loaded into or onto the transport vehicle B Certification 262 21 b The following certification must appear on the manifest This is to certify that the above named materials are properly classified described packaged marked labeled and are in proper condition for transportation according to the applicable regulations of the Department of Transportation and the EPA C 18 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 19 of 23 5 COPIES OF MANIFEST REQURED 5262 22 The manifest must consist of at least the number of copies to provide the generator each transporter and the owner or operator of the designated facility with one copy each for their records and another copy to he returned to the generator 6 USE OF THE MANIFEST 262 23 A The generator must 1 Sign the manifest certification by hand 2 obtain the handwritten signature of the initial transporter and date of acceptance of manifest and 3 Retain one copy in accordance with 262 40 a The generator must give the transporter the remaining copies of the manifest C Shipment of hazardous waste within the United States solely by railroad or water bulk shipments only the generator must send three 3 copies of the manifest dated and signed in accordance with 262 20 to the owner or operator of the designated facility NOTE Copies of the manifest are not required for each transporter For specia provisisions for rail or water bulk shipment tr
137. e containing buried wastes Soil gas exchange with the ambient atmosphere greatly dilutes gaseous components making them difficult to detect Therefore sampling in the soil can provide a more concentrated source for underground waste detection Soil gas sampling also has particular applicability to the identification of methane fluxes at sanitary landfills Section 4 3 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 4 3 1 METHOD 1V 10 X MONITORING GAS AND VAPORS FROM TEST HOLE Discussion Gas samples can be withdrawn from test holes by using a nonsparking probe brass and Teflon being the most suitable The probe is then attached to the gas inlet of the desired gas monitor such as those described in the ambient gases section and Method IV 1 through 1V 8 The test holes are easily prepared by driving a metal rod approximately 1 in diameter into the soi with a drive weight Commercial bar hole makers are available that combine the steel hole making bar and drive weight into one unit see Figure 4 7 Uses This system is particularly adapted for rapid evaluation of waste sites for soil gas generation When used in conjunction with a hydrocarbon analyzer or an explosimeter it can rapidly determine the areal extent of a waste site or the location of a particular emission source It is recommended that the test area be screened with a metal detector before sampling Procedures for Use 1 Select location free from rocks and debris Screen location with me
138. e Quantity if appropriate See Figure 1 2 The required shipping description on a Shipping paper and all copies that are used for transportation purposes must be legible and printed manually or mechanically in English 3 Unless it is specifically authorized or required the required shipping description may not contain any code or abbreviation C12 roper fori de Appendix C Revision 0 Page 13 of 23 Soe oo by __ 22 bee sehor curmecimes ean WAZAROOUS MATERIALS ENTRIESCORTRASTNG COLOR EE a Ph eS IMEIL L TIT Sree tabes Fannie NUN a305 me QUEM 2 q d CEP GV 42400055 MATERIALS PREFIZED 87 T7 NU COLUNA FIGURE 1 MAZARDOUS MATERIALS LISTED ON SHIPPING PAPERS C 13 5 Appendix Revision 0 Page 14 of 23 4 A shipping paper may contain additional information concerning the material provided the information is not inconsistent with the required description Unless otherwise permitted or required additional information must be placed after the basic descrip tion required bv Sec 172 202 a a When appropriate the entries IMCO or IMCO Class may he entered immediately before or immediately following the class entry in the basic description b If a material meets the definition of more then one hazard class the additiona hazard class or classes may
139. e at 400 C for 15 to 30 minutes Some high boiling materials such as PCB s may not be eliminated by this treatment Glassware should be sealed stored in a clean environment immediately after drying or cooling to prevent any accumulation of dust or other contaminants Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil Apparatus Appendix A Revision 0 Page 33 of 52 Method 608 Organochlorine Pesticides and PCBs and Materials Sampling equipment for discrete or composite sampling Grab sample bottle Amber glass 1 liter or 1 quart volume French or Boston Round design is recommended The container must be washed and solvent rinsed before use to minimize interferences Bottle caps Threaded to screw on to the sample bottles Caps must be lined with Teflon Foil may be substituted if sample is not corrosive Compositing equipment Automatic or manual compositing system Must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of 25U ml Sample containers must be kept refrigerated during sampling No Tygon or rubber tubing may be used in the system Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Grab samples must be collected in glass containers Conventional sampling practices should be followed except that the bottle must not be prewashed with sample before collection Composite samples Should be collected in refrigerated glass containers Automatic sampling equipment must be free of Tygon and other potential sources
140. e at calibration conditions liters min temperature of air during calibration K R pressure of air during calibration mm Hg Hg T standard absolute temperature 298 K 537 R P standard absolute pressure 760 mm Hg 29 92 in Hg Pho vapor pressure of water at T mm Hg in Hg Mark level achieved during flow rate setting on rotameter and record on sampling data sheets for reference To ensure acceptable flow rate precision this reference setting on the rotameter should be maintained during sampling The rotameter can either be integral with the pump as in the MSA Monitaire Model or separate Note that in this case the rotameter is used only as visual reference To ensure correctness of the reference point calibration conditions should not deviate from sampling conditions by more than the following Temperature 15 C Barometric pressure 10 mm Hg 2 Calibration of Constant Flow Pump Systems Select a set of sample pumps and assemble necessary equipment Figure 4 2 depicts a calibration set up developed by E l DuPont de Nemours and Company for use with their constant flow sampling pumps This configuration or equivalent is acceptable b Calibrate each pump according to the following basic steps In addition consult the manufacturer s instructions for specific details unique to the model in use 4 42 Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 11 of 15 FLOW RATE ME
141. e bottle with an appropriate sample tag Be sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Record the information in the field logbook and complete the chain of custody form 3 5 Section 3 2 1 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 10 Properly clean and decontaminate the equipment prior to reuse or storage Appendix Sources GCA Corporation Quality Assurance Plan Love Canal Study Appendix A Sampling Procedures EPA Contract 68 02 3168 3 6 Section 3 2 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 3 2 2 METHOD 111 2 USE OF POND SAMPLER FOR THE COLLECTI ON OF SURFACE WATER SAMPLES Discussion The pond sampler consists of an adjustable clamp attached to the end of a two or three piece telescoping aluminum tube that serves as the handle The clamp is used to secure a sampling beaker see Figure 3 1 The sampler is not commercially available but it is easily and inexpensively fabricated The tubes can be readily purchased from most hardware or swimming pool supply stores The adjustable clamp and sampling beaker can be obtained from most laboratory supply houses The materials required to fabricate the sampler are given in Appendix B Uses The pond sampler is used to collect liquid waste samples from disposal ponds pits lagoons and similar reservoirs Grab samples can be obtained at distances as far as 3 5 m from the edge of the ponds The tubular aluminum handle may bow when sampling very viscous li
142. e degree of decontamination Individuals departing the CRC for a break lunch end of day etc must be thoroughly decontaminated Effectiveness of Decontamination There is no method to immediately determine how effective decontamination is in removing contaminants Discolorations stains corrosive effects and substances adhering to objects may indicate contaminants have not been removed However observable effects only indicate surface contamination and not permeation absorption into clothing Also many contaminants are not easily observed A method for determining effectiveness of surface decontamination is swipe testing Cloth or paper patches swipes are wiped over predetermined surfaces of the suspect object and analyzed in a laboratory Both the inner and outer surfaces of protective clothing should be swipe tested Positive indications of both sets of swipes would indicate surface contamination has not been removed and substances have penetrated or permeated through the garment Swipe tests can also be done on skin or inside clothing Permeation of protective garments requires laboratory analysis of a piece of the material Both swipe and permeation testing provide after the fact information Along with visual observations results of these tests can help evaluate the effectiveness of decontamination Equi pment Decontamination equipment materials and supplies are generally selected based on availability Other considerations
143. e gas amplification process inherent in this type of detector allows a single beta particle or gamma photon to be detected It should be noted that these devices are sensitive instruments and care should be taken not to exceed their maximum capacity to prevent damage to the GM tube Scintillation Detectors These devices depend upon light produced when ionizing radiation interacts with a media solid crystal used in survey instruments The produced flashes of light or scintillations fall onto a photomultiplier tube which converts them to electrical impulses These impulses are amplified and subsequently measured to give an indication of the level of radiation present These are extremely sensitive instruments used to detect alpha beta or gamma radiation simply by choosing the correct crystal Alpha particles are detected with a silver activated zinc sulfide screen beta radiation with an anthracene crystal covered with a thin metal foil to screen alpha particles and gamma or x ray with a sodium iodide crystal The instrument can be calibrated in the same manner as for ion chambers and Geiger Mueller instruments The operator should keep in mind that in older models the photomultiplier tube may be damaged if directly exposed to light without first disconnecting the voltage 5 6 Section 5 3 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 5 3 1 METHOD V 1 RADIATION SURVEY INSTRUMENTS Discussion As previously noted a variety of radiation survey instrumentat
144. e routes which the wastes could migrate off site and 4 the effects that would occur or might have occurred through the discharge of waste Goals and Scope A clear definition of the goals of the investigation and a detailed explanation of the tasks and phases designed to provide the information necessary to obtain the goals should LC Section 1 5 Revision 0 Page 2 of 5 The goals may be a general characterization of the site or a determination of offsite migration of contaminants or the collection of physical evidence for enforcement proceedings Generally it is a combination of these or other potential goals which must be considered Investigators must be aware that Short sighted goal assignment may limit utility of data for future applications The scope of the investigation should be outlined as discrete phases and tasks The sequence and timeframe for each task should be delineated on a project time table or time line with key decision points and options clearly displayed Efficient arrangement of tasks to minimize onsite time will lead to reduced risks by reducing exposure times Organization of the Field Teams Before sampling can commence the following responsibilities must be delegated into the following roles Project Team Leader is primarily an administrator when not participating in the field investigation Field Team Leader is responsible for the overall operation and safety of the field team Site
145. e used as the shipping paper 3 THE MANIFEST GENERAL REQUI RMENTS 262 20 A A generator shipper who transportS or offers for transportation hazardous waste for off site treatment storage or disposal must prepare a manifest before transporting the waste off site B A generator shipper must designate on the manifest one facility which is permitted to handle the waste described on the manifest C A generator shipper may also designate on the manifest one alternate facility which nt ermitted to handle his waste in the event an emergency prevents delivery of the e to the primary desi gnated facility 0 the transporter carrier is unable to deliver the waste to the designated facility the generator must either designate another facility or instruct the transporter to return the waste 4 MANIFEST INFORMATION 5262 21 e manifest must contain 1 2 3 4 5 6 Manifest document number Generator s Shipper s name mailing address telephone number and the EPA identification number Name end EPA identification number of each transporter carrier Name address and EPA identification number of the designated facility and an alternate facility if any Description of the waste s e g proper shipping name required by the Department of Transportation Hazardous Naterials Regulations CFR Title 49 172 101 172 202 and 172 203 and Total quantity of each hazardous waste by units of weight or volum
146. earlier and cannot be over emphasized are the demands on the FTL for documentation and recordkeeping these tasks must also closely adhere to docu ment control procedures Without these records and documented assurance of their completeness and validity litigation and cost recovery efforts will be severely handicapped Section 1 7 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 1 7 REFERENCES 1 Kateman G and F W Pijpers Quality Control in Analytical Chemistry John Wiley and Sons New York 1981 Smith R and G James The Sampling of Bulk Materials Analytical Sciences Monographs Volume 8 The Royal Society of Chemistry London 1981 Section 2 1 Revision 1 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 2 0 SOLIDS 2 1 GENERAL The sampling of solid or semi solid materials is complicated by the structural properties of the material For example the presence of entrapped gases and fluids is often an integral part of the substance and may be of consequence in the analytical techniques for which the sample was collected It is necessary in most cases to collect a sample which does not alter this balance In addition physical strength and density of the material demand sampling devices of significant rigidity and strength As a result a great deal of disturbance will occur at the sample sampler interface These effects can be reduced by careful sampling and by collecting aliquots with a high volume to surface area ratio A solid does not necessarily have uniform characte
147. ed illnesses range from heat fatigue to heat stroke the most serious Heat stroke requires prompt treatment to prevent irreversible damage or death Protective clothing may have to be cut off Less serious forms of heat stress require prompt attention or they may lead to a heat stroke Unless the victim is obviously contaminated decontamination should be omitted or minimized and treatment begun immediately Chemical Exposure Exposure to chemicals can be divided into two categories e Injuries from direct contact such as acid burns or inhalation of toxic chemicals Potential injury due to gross contamination on clothing or equipment For the contaminant inhaled treatment can only be by qualified physicians If the contaminant is on the skin or in the eyes immediate measures must be taken to counteract the substance s effect First aid treatment usually is flooding the affected area with water however for a few chemicals water may cause more severe problems When protective clothing is grossly contaminated contaminants may be transferred to treatment personnel or the wearer and cause injuries Unless severe medical problems have occurred simultaneously with splashes the protective clothing should be washed off as rapidly as possible and carefully removed 8 Appendix Revison 0 Page 9 of 11 PROTECTION FOR DECONTAMINATION WORKERS The Level of Protection worn by decontamination workers is determined by Expected or visi
148. ed nosepiece on the bottom and a ball or other type of check valve on the top The check valve allows water to pass through the corer on descent but prevents a washout during recovery The tapered nosepiece facilitates cutting and reduces core disturbance during penetration Most corers are constructed of brass or steel and many can accept plastic liners and additional weights see Figure 2 3 Uses Corers are capable of collecting samples of most sludges and sediments They collect essentially undisturbed samples which represent the profile of Strata which may develop in sediments and sludges during variations in the deposition process Depending on the density of the substrate and the weight of the corer penetration to depths of 75 cm 30 inches can attained Care should be exercised when using gravity corers in vessels or lagoons that have liners because penetration depths could exceed that of the substrate and result in damage to the liner material Procedures for Use 1 Attach a precleaned corer to the required length of sample line Solid braided 5 mm 3 16 inch nylon line is sufficient 20 mm 3 4 inch nylon however is easier to grasp during hand hoisting 2 Secure the free end of the line to a fixed support to prevent accidental loss of the corer 3 Allow corer to free fall through liquid to bottom 4 Retrieve corer with a smooth continuous lifting motion Do not bump corer as this may result in some sample loss
149. edia and compound ABSTRACT Investigations at hazardous waste sites and sites of chemical spills often require onsite measurements and sampling activities to assess the type and extent of contamination This document is a compilation of sampling methods and materials suitable to address most needs that arise during routine waste site and hazardous spill investigations The sampling methods presented in this document are compiled by media and were selected on the basis of practicality economics representativeness comparability with analytical considerations and safety as well as other criteria In addition to sampling procedures sample handling and shipping chain of custody procedures instrument certification equipment fabrication and equipment decontamination procedures are described Sampling methods for soil sludges sediments and bulk materials cover the solids medium Ten methods are detailed for surface waters groundwater and containerized liquids twelve are presented for ambient air soil gases and vapors and headspace gases A brief discussion of ionizing radiation survey instruments is also provided CONTENTS Section 1 0 Introduction 1 1 General 1 2 Method Selection Criteria 1 3 Purpose and Objective of Sampling 1 4 Types of Samples 1 5 Sampling Plan 1 6 Implementation of Sampling Plan 1 7 References 2 0 Solids 2 1 General 2 2 Soils 2 2 1 Method 11 1 Soil Sampling with a Spade and Scoop 2 2 2 Method Il 2
150. ediately following the preliminary assessments This plan should be concise comprehensible and address the following items Review existing work or background Define goals and scope of work Organization of the field teams Statistical strategy Quality assurance Quality control procedures Safety considerations and Decontamination procedures Please note that this list of sampling plan components is not al inclusive Additional elements may be inserted or altered depending on the needs of the project It should be understood that in emergency situations personal judgement may have to be implemented In any event actions should be dictated by plan to maintain logical and consistent order to the task Additional details concerning the development of a Sampling Plan can be found in Volume Section 6 Reviewing Existing Work or Background Information A synopsis of the site operational history as well as a review of previous study conclusions and recommendations are necessary in order to familiarize the field team members with the investigation In addition this section should include regional or state maps locating the investigation area as well as detailed maps and photos of the local site Of particular importance to the investigators is information pertaining to the following points 1 the composition and characteristics of the wastes 2 the adequate storage or destruction of wastes on the site 3 th
151. edure Work Function The work each person does determines the potential for contact with hazardous materials In turn this dictates the layout of the decontamination line Observers photographers operators of air samplers or others in the Exclusion Zone performing tasks that will not bring them in contact with contaminants may not need for example to have their garments washed or rinsed Others in the Exclusion Zone with a potential for direct contact with the hazardous material will require more thorough decontamination Different decontamination lines could be set up for different job functions or certain stations in a line could be omitted for personnel performing certain tasks E 5 Appendix E Revision 0 Page 6 of 11 Location of Contami nati on Contamination on the upper areas of protective clothing poses a greater risk to the worker because volatile compounds may generate a hazardous breathing concentration both for the worker and for the decontamination personnel There is also an increased probability of contact with skin when doffing the upper part of clothing Reason for Leaving Site The reason for leaving the Exclusion Zone also determines the need and extent of decontamination A worker leaving the Exclusion Zone to pick up or drop off tools or instruments and immediately return may not require decontamination However a worker leaving to get a new air cylinder or to change a respirator or canister may require som
152. effects Teflon or glass are preferable to steel or brass in this application The intake probe is then connected to the desired gas monitor such as those described in the ambient gases section and Methods IV 1 through IV 8 Uses Existing groundwater monitoring wells can be used to check for the presence of those gases volatilized or otherwise liberated from the groundwater In some cases the groundwater level will be below the top of the screened portion of the well allowing free soil gases to enter the well casi ng Wells especially designed for soil gas monitoring can also be placed by conventional well placement techniques The well casing however is perforated the entire distance the annular space is packed with gravel and the top is sealed with a grout The top of the casing can even be equipped with a sampling valve to allow easy coupling to the monitoring instruments Procedures for Use 1 Sound the well for water level or bottom 1 Select the required length of Teflon tubing It should be of sufficient length to approach the water level or well bottom but not so long as to allow water or bottom sediments to enter probe inlet An inside diameter of 1 8 inch is usually sufficient However because this size lacks rigidity a small weight can be secured to the inlet end to facilitate placement 3 Lower the tubing through an appropriate sized stopper on the top of the well casing A wooden plug serves well It is not crit
153. emoval from the borehole Procedures for Use 1 Attach the auger bit to a drill rod extension and further attach the T handle to the drill rod 2 Clear the area to be sampled of any surface debris twigs rocks litter It may be advisable to remove the first 8 to 5 cm of surface soil for an area approximately 15 cm in radius around the drilling location 2 5 Section 2 2 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 Figure 2 1 Augers and thin wall tube sampler 2 6 10 12 Sources Section 2 2 3 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Begin drilling periodically removing accumulated soils This prevents accidentally brushing loose material back down the borehole when removing the auger or adding drill rods After reaching desired depth slowly and carefully remove auger from boring Note When sampling directly from auger collect sample after auger is removed from boring and proceed to Step 10 Remove auger tip from drill rods and replace with a precleaned thin wall tube sampler Install proper cutting tip Carefully lower corer down borehole Gradually force corer into soil Care should be taken to avoid scraping the borehole sides Hammering of the drill rods to facilitate coring should be avoided as the vibrations may cause the boring walls to collapse Remove corer and unscrew drill rods Remove cutting tip and remove core from device Discard top of core approximately 2 5 cm which represents any material collected by the co
154. ential or most commonly conductivity may be the most accurate and reliable method of assuring complete well purging and it also reduces the likelihood of over overpurging The technique is easily implemented in the field and gives a rapid and positive indication of changes in the well bore water This change in the water character and subsequent stabilization can normally be interpreted as evidence that sufficient purging has occurred It should be noted that the sensitivity of these parameters to changes as a result of exposure of groundwater to surface level conditions i e changes in the partial pressure of dissolved gases or the conditions of the purging system make in situ monitoring desirable An alternative to this would be to conduct these measurements in a closed cell attached to the discharge side of the pump system Other factors which will influence the amount of purging required before sampling include the pumping rate and the placement of the pumping equipment within the column of water in the well bore For example recent studies have shown that if a pump is lowered immediately to the bottom of a wel before pumping it may take some time for the column of water above it to be exchanged if the transmissivity of the aquifer is high and the well screen 3 28 Section 3 4 Revision 0 Page 5 of 7 In such cases the pump will be drawing 8 is at the bottom of the casing water primarily from the aquifer This has been fu
155. entially a long hollow tube with evenly spaced openings along its length This tube is placed inside an outer sleeve with similar openings and forced into the material The inner sleeve is rotated until its openings align with those on the outer sleeve thus allowing the material to enter The inner sleeve is then further rotated sealing the openings the device is withdrawn and the sample recovered Grain thiefs are available in many materials including brass and various plastics As with other sampling devices care should be taken to choose a construction material which will not compromise the desired analytical results A more detailed treatment of this subject Bulk Materials can be found in The Sampling of Bulk Materials by R Smith and G V James The Royal Society of Chemistry London 1981 Although this book does not deal specifically with hazardous waste sampling the concepts discussed especially on the subject of the establishment of a sampling scheme are readily applicable 2 18 Section 2 4 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 2 4 1 METHOD 11 7 SAMPLING OF BULK MATERIAL WITH A SCOOP OR TRIER Discussion typical sampling trier Figure 2 5 is a long tube with a slot that extends almost its entire length The tip and edges of the tube slot are sharpened to allow the trier to cut a core of the material to be sampled when rotated after insertion into the material Sampling triers are usually made of stainless steel with wooden hand
156. epress igniter switch observe indicator needle for positive response and listen for a pop If flame fails to light depress igniter switch again Once detector flame is lit unit is ready for use If calibration to a specific hydrocarbon species is desired complete this procedure according to the manufacturers instructions Hold sample probe in close proximity to area in question as low sample rate allows for only very localized readings Slow sweeping motion will help prevent the bypassing of problem areas Make sure batteries are recharged within time frame specified in operator manual Usual length of operating time between charges is 8 12 hours Some units have alarms that signal operator if detector flame goes out If this alarm sounds evacuate all personnel and relight flame in known safe area then reenter site Monitor fuel and or combustion air supply gauges regularly to insure sufficient gas supplies High background readings after prolonged use may indicate sample probe and or in line filters in front of detector need to be cleaned Use of pipe cleaners or clean air blown backwards through filters is adequate Do not use organic solvents as detector will respond to solvent as well Representative readings will also depend on performance of routine maintenance as described in detail in operating manual Also since unit contains pressurized gas supplies perform leak check procedures regularly as leaking hydrogen gas i
157. epth or sweep the width of narrow streams If a medical grade silicone tubing is used in the peristaltic pump the system is suitable for sampling almost any parameter including most organics Some volatile stripping however may occur and though the system may have a high flow rate some material may be lost on the tubing Therefore pumping methods should be avoided for sampling volatile organics or oil and grease Battery operated pumps of this type are available and can be easily hand carried or carried with a shoulder sling It is necessary in most situations to change both the Teflon suction line as well as the silicon pump tubing between sample locations to avoid cross contamination This requires maintaining a sufficiently large stock of material to avoid having to clean the tubing in the field These tubings are quite expensive but their relatively inert nature makes thorough decontamination in the lab both practical and simple thus allowing reuse It should be noted that the Teflon suction tubing is an effective substitute for that supplied with the sophisticated automatic liquid waste samplers such as the ISCO Model 2100 and Manning Models 3000 and 5 4040 Wien medical grade silicon tubing is not available or the analytical requirements are particularly strict the system can be altered as described in Method 111 3 Figure 3 3 In this configuration the sample volume accumulates in the vacuum flask and does not enter the pump The in
158. eption is mercury analysis which must be completed within 28 days Quality Control Serious errors may be introduced during sampling and storage by failure to remove residues of previous samples from the sample container therefore follow the described rinsing procedure for all containers and sampling equipment Appendix A Revision 0 Page 23 of 52 Nitrogen Ammonia Nitrate Nitrite Kjeldahl Nitrogen Appendix A Revision 0 Page 24 of 52 Ammonia Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles conc sulfuric acid 2504 ACS Sample Collection Preservation and Handling In the event that a prompt analysis is impossible add conc sulfuric acid to lower sample pH to less than 2 All samples should be analyzed within 28 days of collection Store samples at 4 C Quality Control The most reliable results are obtained from fresh samples Appendix A Revision 0 Page 25 of 52 Kjeldahl Nitrogen Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles conc sulfuric acid H2904 ACS Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Acidify samples with conc sulfuric acid to a pH of 2 0 or less Store samples at 4 C All samples should be analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control The most reliable results are obtained in fresh samples If prompt analysis is impossible retard biological activity with the above preservation method Appendix A Revision 0
159. er while the valve permits the removal of sample gas for analysis The valve and pressure gauge can also be used to insure pressure equalization prior to further opening of the container light is located on the remote control switch which indicates when the drum has been pierced The electrical control system is interlocked so that drill operation automatically stops upon penetration of the container by the drill bit The whole assembly is activated remotely Once the bit has penetrated the drum contained gases flow between the drill bit and the inside of the fittings Release of the gases is controlled by a needle valve After sampling the drill mechanism is pulled away from the container until the drill bit clears the ball valve The ball valve is then closed and the piercing mechanism up to the ball valve is removed from the container The ball valve and mounting plate are left intact to serve as a permanent seal for the opening The monitors and detectors described in the Ambient Section Methods IV 1 through 1V 8 can then be adapted to the needle valve and the gas directed to the instrument Uses This device has been used on 55 gallon drums but would also be applicable to other size drums and vessels Fabrication specifications for this device are found in Appendix B 4 69 Section 4 4 2 Revision 0 SPRING LOADING Page 2 of 4 a DEPTH STOP TRS _ 1 CUT OFF SWITCH MOUNTIN
160. er wishing to have an electrical device certified by FM or UL must submit a prototype for testing If the unit passes it is certified as submitted However the manufacturer agrees to allow the testing laboratory to randomly check the manufacturing plant at any time as well as any marketed units Furthermore any change in the unit requires the manufacturer to notify the test laboratory which can continue the certification or withdraw it until the modified unit can be retested A unit may be certified either by UL FM or both Both Laboratories follow test protocols established by NFPA and ANSI Therefore one certification is no better or worse than the other The important consideration is that the device is approved for the Class es Division s and Group s it will be used in The mention of FM or UL in the manufacturer s equipment literature does not guarantee certification All certified devices that are used in hazardous flammable locations must be marked to show Class Division and Group per NEC Table 500 2 bh Other organizations such as the Mine Safety and Health Administration MSHA Canadian Standards Association CSA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA and the U S Coast Guard USCG have developed their own testing and certification schemes for electrical devices in hazardous locations common to their jurisdiction 6 Appendix F Revision 0 Page 7 of 7 MSHA tests and certifies electrical equ
161. ers are tall narrow buckets equipped with a check valve on the bottom This valve allows water to enter from the bottom as the bailer is lowered then prevents its release as the bailer is raised see Figure 3 8 Top filling bailers are also available and may be useful for well purging but generally result in increased sample turbulence and are not recommended for sample acquisition Uses This device is particularly useful when samples must be recovered from depths greater than the range or capability of suction lift pumps when volatile stripping is of concern or when well casing diameters are too narrow to accept submersible pumps It is the method of choice for the collection of samples which are susceptible to volatile component stripping or degradation due to the aeration associated with most other recovery systems Samples can be recovered with a minimum of aeration if care is taken to gradually lower the bailer until it contacts the water surface and is then allowed to sink as it fills Teflon is generally the best construction material but other materials PVC stainless steel etc are acceptable if compatible with designated sample analysis The primary disadvantages of bailers are their limited sample volume and inability to collect discrete samples from a depth below the water surface Procedures for Use 1 Using clean noncontaminating equipment i e an electronic level indicator avoid indicating paste determine the water le
162. ers could made in advance thus eliminating the time involved for onsite cleanup Heat shrinkable Teflon tubing or other types of Teflon coating can also be used to cover the stainless steel rod if contact of the stainless steel with the waste is undesirable Section 3 3 1 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 When a solid is encountered in a drum either layer or bottom sludge the optional method described above may be used to collect a core of the material or the material may be collected with a disposable scoop attached to a length of wooden or plastic rod 4 If analysis is to be performed onsite packing steps 12 and 13 may be deleted These steps are necessary for transporting and or shipping samples Sources American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Recommended Practices for Sampling Industrial Chemicals ASTM 300 73 U S Environmental Protection Agency Technical Methods for Investigating Sites Containing Hazardous Substances Technical Monograph 1 29 Draft Ecology and the Environment June 1981 11 12 13 14 Section 3 3 1 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 Replace the bung or place plastic over the drum Place sample container in a Ziplock plastic bag one per bag Place each bagged container in a l gallon metal paint can or appropriate sized container and pack in vermiculite packing material Place lid on the can Mark the sample identification number on the outside of each paint can and comp
163. es Monograph Volume 8 Royal Society of Chemistry London 1981 Sisk S W Manual for Groundwater Subsurface Investigations at Hazardous Waste Sites EPA 330 9 81 002 1981 Scalf J McNabb W Dunlap R Crosby and J Fryberger Manual for Groundwater Sampling Procedures S Kerr Environmental Research Laboratory Office of Research and Development Ada 1980 deVera R B P Simmons R D Stephen and D L Storm Samplers and Sampling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams EPA 600 2 80 018 January 1980 2 25 Section 3 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 SECTION 3 0 LI QUI DS 3 1 GENERAL Liquids by their nature are a relatively easy substance to collect Obtaining representative samples however is more difficult Density volubility temperature currents and a wealth of other mechanisms cause changes in the composition of a liquid with respect to both time and distance Accurate sampling must be responsive to these dynamics and reflect their actions For the purpose of this manual liquids will include both aqueous and nonaqueous solutions and will be subdivided as surface waters containerized liquids and ground waters Surface waters will be considered as any fluid body flowing or otherwise whose surface is open to the atmosphere This will include rivers streams discharges ponds and impoundments both aqueous and nonaqueous The containerized liquid section will address sampling of
164. es of vapor phase hydrocarbons depends upon the ratios and the types of organic compounds present and cannot be related to a specific vapor concentration FIDs do nonetheless provide a useful and reliable tool for general assessment purposes Photoionization analyzers such as the portable HNU Model P1 101 are also capable of detecting the presence of a wide variety of chemical species both organic and inorganic As with FID s photoionization detectors suffer similar limitations of detector response to component mixtures inability to respond to certain compounds must be recognized however PID s can provide important information for evaluation purposes As stated previously the usefulness of both portable FID s and PID s can be expanded when used in conjunction with gas chromatography The Century units offer a chromatography option which when used properly can be quite a valuable tool for aiding in specific compound identification At present the P1 101 is not available with a chromatography option however Spittler and Oi report success with a portable photoionization detector gas chromatography Photovac 10A10 Thornhill Ontario capable of sensitivity in the 0 1 to 10 ppb range In all cases it should be realized that chromatography can be quite complex and demands the skills of an experienced operator to obtain valid and meaningful results Additional useful instruments and devices include those adapted from industrial
165. es should be analyzed onsite Quality Control e It is important that all sample bottles be sealed airtight with no entrapped air Appendix A Revison 0 Page 45 of 52 Surfactants Apparatus and Materials e Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling 9 Store samples at 4 C e All samples must be analyzed within 48 hours of collection Quality Control e No special precautions Appendix A Revison 0 Page 46 of 52 Total Organic Carbon TOC Apparatus and Materials Glass bottles with Teflon lined caps hydrochloric acid 2504 ACS Sample Collection Preservation and Handling e Acidify samples with conc hydrochloric acid to a pH of 2 0 or less Store samples at 4 C e All samples should be analyzed within 28 days of collection Ouality Control e Avoid exposure of the sample to light and atmosphere minimize storage time Appendix A Revision 0 Page 47 of 52 Total Organic Halide TOX Apparatus and Materials Glass bottles amber with Teflon lined caps Sodium sulfite 5 0 1 M Sample Collection Preservation and Handling amber glass bottles are not available samples should be protected from light Samples should be stored at 4 C without headspace Reduce residual chlorine by the addition of 1 ml of 0 1 M sodium sulfite per liter of sample TOX may increase with storage therefore samples should be analyzed
166. eter by 10 cm long hexane rinsed glass tubes The glass tubes are constructed from 22 mm inside diameter stock which has been tapered at one end to facilitate attachment to the sampling pump A teflon reducing adaptor can also be fabricated which permits attachment to the sampling pump with no modification to the glass tube The cartridges are then placed in teflon sealed 38 mm x 200 mm culture tubes wrapped with aluminum foil to protect the sampling cartridges from ultraviolet light Any high volume personnel sampling pump capable of maintaining a constant flow rate of 3 to 4 liter minute can be used Samples are collected at this nominal flow rate for between 8 to 12 hours allowing a total sample volume of between 1 to 4 cubic meters m Polyurethane foam has been shown to be excellent for trapping a wide variety of semivolatile organic compounds in ambient air including numerous chlorinated pesticides 7 polychlorinated biphenyls PCBs polychlorinated naphtalenes herbicides and their corresponding methyl esters organophosporus pesticides chlorinated henzenes chlorinated phenols and polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons Table 4 8 lists the representative components of the above compound classes that have been collected in ambient air using this technique Uses This procedure and modifications of this procedure have been used successfully to collect airborne chlorinated organics including pesticides PCBs and a va
167. ew should be performed to perfect and prove the method for these compounds prior to actual sampling and analysis Procedures for Use L Calibration of Sampling Pumps Equipped with Rotameter Needle Valve Combi nati on Select set of sampling pumps and assemble necessary equi pment see Figure 4 1 Calibrate each pump as follows b Measure ambient air temperature barometric pressure and relative humidity Determine water vapor pressure from tables b If battery test is available check battery d Place calibrator sorbent cartridge in line and start pump Allow pump to stabilize Do not use this calibrator cartridge for actual sampling however it can be reused for additional calibration runs e Determine actual flow rate f with bubble tube flowmeter Distance traveled ml Travel time min f Adjust flow rate of the sampler to the desired rate by adjusting the needle valve Verify that the flow rate has been achieved by checking against bubble tube three times Calculate a mean value by summing the values of the three individual readings and dividing by three The deviation of the individual flow rates from the mean flow rate should not exceed 5 percent Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 4 of 15 TABLE 4 5 COMPOUNDS SUCCESSFULLY MONITORED USING TENAX SAMPLING PROTOCOLS 2 Chl oropropane 1 1 Di chl oroethene Bromoethane Chloropropane Bromochloromethane Chloroform Tetrahydrofuran 1 2 Dichl
168. explosive limit or UEL also UFL upper flammability limt is the concentration of gas in air above which there is insufficient oxygen available to support combustion and an explosion is unlikely A flame however may burn at the gas air interface or should additional air enter the mixture a very explosive atmosphere may develop In general the instruments respond in the following manner The meter indicates 0 5 LEL 50 percent This means that 50 percent of the concentration of combustible gas needed to reach an unstable combustible situation is present lf the LEL of the gas is 5 percent in air then the instrument indicates a 2 5 percent mixture is present The meter needle stays above 1 0 LEL 100 percent This means that the concentration of combustible gas is greater than the LEL and less than the UEL and therefore immediately combustible and explosive The meter needle rises above the 1 0 100 percent mark and then returns to zero This response indicates the ambient atmosphere has a combustible gas concentration greater than the UEL Of the many instruments commercially available for detecting combustible or explosive gas some are not certified safe for operation in the atmospheres they can detect It is important to use only those monitors that are certified safe for use in atmospheres greater than 25 percent of the LEL Appendix F discusses the electrical product certification programs and details the various atmos
169. ext of this section deals with area monitoring and not personne monitoring Although ambient methods can provide information on the types of contaminants present and the relative magnitude of contamination it is not a substitute for personnel monitoring when worker exposure is the prime concern In such cases NIOSH methodologies should be consulted and appropriate methods chosen dependent upon specific monitoring requirements 4 4 Section 4 2 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 4 2 1 METHOD I V 1 DETERMINING OXYGEN CONTENT IN AMBIENT AND WORKPLACE ENVIRONMENTS WITH A PORTABLE OXYGEN MONITOR Discussion A portable oxygen monitor has three principle components for operation the airflow system the oxygen sensing device and the microamp meter Typically the air is drawn through the oxygen sensor with a built in pump or aspirator bulb although some instruments use passive cells The sensor indicates the oxygen content and the information is translated electrochemically to the meter Most monitors have meters which indicate the oxygen content from 0 25 percent There are also oxygen monitors available which indicate concentrations on scales from 0 5 percent and 0 100 percent The most useful for ambient measurements is the 0 25 percent oxygen content readout Many instruments also have alarm modes which can be set to activate at a specified oxygen concentration Uses Portable oxygen monitors are invaluable when initially responding to hazardous
170. f 52 Rev 001 skep 1 3 009 9 d 93150905 40 qeug papuadsns 001 shep 3 7 1009 9 d 23150602 paalossig 001 sKep 2 9 1009 5 4 93150040 1055 10 105 os 4 82 2 7 1003 4 4249 2301 0 82 3 9 1005 231 06 0 gt 0 0 5 26 5430 9 gt Hd Conn 9 4 231504805 40 4249 2 Hd 03 08 sKep 82 052 9 0 1009 9 d 231506802 9 12301 snaoudsoud 3 7 1009 e eudsoud 05 sAnou gp 931500 493113 9 4 231506802 4849 09340 snaoudsoud 2 Hd 03 00 os H 3 9 1009 9 3 0 40 104244 sanoy 2 931540 9 d 4949 ud 0 32 23 4934 OE uoj32943x9 de paujL 5824 sep 3 7 1005 401321 9 1 0 pue 511594 092 91143 deo peujL pue 0 32 3 7 1009 9 qeJ9 52 394040 ded SuUOQq 4 20 29 Ov SACP yt 2 7 1009 9 9249 2u09 95119620 99813 UO 39 A49S3Jd 2300 nd 4391 49390949 d 0 0 139 192 tW WEEZEEEEXEZEEZEETIEZPTZZEKEREEEXEZEZIZXZIEBEBEEENZSEIEREZEIXEZXEEXZIEEERESENEEZEIEEZEXIEELCSE E ZNEELZEZEREEEERSERENENEEEENEENSSSEX 3 T Y 37891 A 51
171. f annular packing if any This information will aid in evaluating the suitability of the well for sampling for a particular analysis For instance if the well has a galvanized steel casing with a brass well screen it would not be suitable for trace element analysis Similarly if the well is located in a swampy area the type and amount of grout or fill around the well casing would determine the degree of surface water inflow to the well that might be expected Most of the information necessary is available on the well drillers log An example of a completed drillers log is included as Figure 3 6 It should be noted 3 25 Section 3 4 Revision 0 Page 2 of 7 OBSERVATION WELL CONSTRUCTION SUMMARY 78137 WELL NO Glacial Drift COORDINATES AQUIFER DATE COMPLETED superviseo _ E Buidobro Elevation of reference point Height of reference point above ground surface Depth of surface seal Type of surface seal concrete MEM T ER pec 1 0 of surface casing Type of surface casing steel with vented locking cap layers of gray 3 h of f till and cutwash Depth of surface casing 1 0 of riser pipe Type of riser pipe galvanized steel __ Diameter of borehole 1 1 cement bentonite Type of filler E i f PT 8 of gravel puoi hat a sand No 20 Elev depth of top of gravel pack 833 54 75 6 834 54 74 6 Elevation depth of XP of sites 826 84 82 3
172. fer to Part 176 C 15 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 16 of 23 E ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION FOR SHIPPING PAPERS Sec 172 203 i 1 Each shipment by water must have the following additional shipping paper entries a Identification of the type of packages such as barrels drums cylinders and boxes b The number of each type of packages including those in freight container or on a pallet and c The gross weight of each type of package or the individual gross weight of each package 2 The shipping papers for a hazardous material offered for transportation by water to any country outside the United States must have in parenthesis the technical name of the material following the propa shipping name when the material is described by 0 5 entry in Sec 17 1 Hazardous Materials Table For example Corrosive liquid 5 chloride Corrosive material However for a mixture only the technical name of any hazardous material giving the mixture its hazardous properties must he identified 9 TRANSPORTATION BY HIGHWAY A SHIPPING PAPERS 177 817 1 General A carrier may not transport a hazardous material unless it is accompanied by a shipping paper that is prepared in accordance with Sec 172 201 172 202 and 172 203 2 Shipper s certification An initial carrier may not accept hazardous materials offered for transportation unless the shipping paper describing the material in cludes a shipper s certificat
173. flutes approximately 12 mm long 5 Drill Skill Model No 2002 hand drill cordless Wired to operate remotely at 300 rpm Interlocked with microswitch attached to depth stop Portalign Drill Assembl y Portalign Portalign Tool Company San Diego California as shown below Appendix B Revision 0 Page 12 of 12 Parts List 101 1 Bere tag 101 2 101 3 Guede 101 4 Sevndiio 101 5 101 6 101 7 Snap hng 101 8 Theb Serow Portalign drill guide Additional Parts Required Per Assembly each 101 8 From Portalign each 101 6 each Springs to fit over guide rods of Portalign approxi matel y 30 kg force each spring when compressed Appendix C Revision 0 Page 1 of 23 APPENDIX C PACKING MARKING LABELING AND SHIPPING OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SAMPLES Portions of this Appendix have been taken by permission from EPA ERT Hazardous Materials Incident Response Operations Training Course Manual 165 1 C1 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 2 of 23 NTRODUCTI ON Samples collected during a response to a hazardous material incident may have to be transported elsewhere for analysis The Environmental Protection Agency EPA encourages compliance with Department of Transportation DOT regulations governing the shipment of hazardous materials These regulations 49 CFR parts 171 through 179 describe proper marking labeling packaging and shipment of hazardous materials substan
174. for Samples Form Wien it becomes necessary to split samples with another source a separate receipt for samples from Figure D 3 is prepared and marked to indicate with whom the samples have been split The signature of the person receiving the samples is required and if this person refuses to sign it should be noted in the Received by space This form also complies with requirements of both Section 3007 a 2 of RCRA and Section 104 of the Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act These sections both state that If the officer employee or representative obtains any samples prior to leaving the premises he shall give to the owner operator or agent in charge a receipt describing the samples obtained and if requested a portion of such sample equal in volume or weight to the portion retained A copy of the completed form must be given to one of the above described individuals even if the offer for split samples is declined Custody Seals Custody seals are narrow strips of adhesive paper used to demonstrate that no tampering has occurred They may be used on sampling equipment or a house door but they are intended for use on a sample transport container which is not secured by a padlock They are not intended for use on individual sample containers 0 9 Appendix D Revision 0 Page 10 Of 11 N 349 Telephone Receipt for Sample forn Figure D 3 5i 24 2
175. ful u e of two column packings has been reported for general purpose use a 10 percent OV 101 on 60 80 mesh Chromasorb W AW DCMS treated and a 1 percent TCEP on 60 80 mesh Chromasorb WHP Spittler has reported use of a 12 inch carbowax column for rapid determination of volatile loading and a 4 ft SE30 column for more efficient separation and quantitation Compound Volatility Generally compounds exhibiting a vapor pressure of less than 1 mm Hg at 20 C will be troublesome to measure with a field portable GC Reasons for this include adsorption of the components on unheated syringe walls the inability to elute the compound from the GC column at ambient temperatures and the GC s inability to measure particulate bound organic matter Compounds in this class include PCBs PAH and most pesticides 4 19 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 4 of 14 TABLE 4 1 COMPOUNDS SHOWN TO BE AMENABLE TO FIELD GC ANALYSIS Dichloromethane methylene chloride Trichloromethane chloroform Carbon tetrachloride Dichloroethane ethylene dichloride 1 2 trans dichloroethylene Trichloroethylene TCE 1 1 1 trichloroethane Tetrachl oroethylene Dimethyl ketone acetone Methyl ethyl ketone MEK Methyl isobutyl ketone MI BK Benzene Methyl benzene toluene Chl orobenzene Ethyl benzene Nitro benzene 1 2 di methyl benzene 0 xylene 1 3 41 methyl benzene m xylene 1 4 di methyl benzene p xylene Ethyl acetate Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 P
176. get compounds may be limited by such factors as interferences ambient conditions and operator experience the data supplied in preliminary assessments using these instruments may be used in determining air sampler placement and approximate compound concentrations Gas chromatography is a technique in which components of a mixture are separated in the gas phase using a solid phase sorbent The mixture is placed on the front end of GC column generally a 1 8 stainless steel tube packed with the appropriate sorbent and flushed through the column with an inert carrier gas Compounds are eluted from the column according to such factors as their affinity for the sorbent and volatility and routed into a detector which may be designed to detect compounds having specific properties or may respond to a more general class Identification of compounds is generally based on elution time from the colum This retention time is dependent upon a number of factors however if these factors are held constant retention times for individual compounds will hold fairly steady Standard mixtures of the compounds of interest are run to determine retention times for the target compounds and sample runs are compared to identify specific eluting peaks While factors affecting retention time can be held constant in laboratory settings this may not be possible under field conditions where lack of power and variable environmental conditions may force compromises in the
177. ging In any case when doubt remains bailers are the best choice for actual sample acquisition Procedures for Use 1 Using clean noncontaminating equipment i e an electronic leve indicator avoid indicating paste or chalk determine the water level in the well then calculate the fluid volume in the casing 2 Lower the precleaned pump to just below the water level and begin pumping Collect or dispose of purged water in an acceptable manner Lower the pump as required to maintain submergence 3 Measure rate of discharge frequently A bucket and stopwatch commonly used 4 Purge a minimum of four casing volumes or until discharge pH conductivity or temperature stabilize See discussion on wel purging in Section 3 4 Groundwater Note If the pump is constructed of materials compatible with the required sample analysis and if the well has recovered sufficiently resound water level sample acquisition can proceed as follows It should be cautioned that all down hole and potentially wetted surfaces must also be noncontaminating noncontributing This includes power and suspension cables and compressed gas or sample tubing 3 40 Section 3 4 5 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 Fill necessary sample bottles by allowing pump discharge to flow gently down the side of bottle with minimal entry turbulence Cap each bottle as filled Select appropriate sample bottles and preserve the sample if necessary as per guidelines in Append
178. h areas of obvious contamination will reduce the probability of becoming contaminated which would require a less elaborate decontamination procedure The initial decontamination plan is based on a worst case situation if no information is available about the incident Specific conditions at the site are then evaluated including of contaminant e The amount of contamination e Levels of protection required e Type of protective clothing worn The initial system is modified eliminating unnecessary stations or otherwise adapting it to site conditions For instance the initial plan might require a complete wash and rinse of chemical protective garments If disposable garments are worn the wash rinse step could be omitted Wearing disposable boot covers and gloves could eliminate washing and rinsing both gloves and disposable boots and reduce the number of stations needed Contamination Reduction Corridor An area within the Contamination Reduction Zone is designated the Contamination Reduction Corridor CRC The CRC controls access into and out of the Exclusion Zone and confines personnel decontamination activities to a limited area The size of the corridor depends on the number of stations in the decontamination procedure overall dimensions of work control zones and amount of space available at the site A corridor of 75 feet by 15 feet should be adequate for full decontamination Whenever possible it should be a straigh
179. he various atmosphere Classes Divisions and Groups for which these devices are approved order to insure safe operation the user must also become familiar with the detailed operation and maintenance procedures found only in the operating manual of each specific instrument The investigator should keep in mind that the procedures outlined here are necessarily general and intended only to supplement the instrument operating manual Investigators must also familiarize themselves with the limitations of each instrument Inability to detect certain compounds insensitivity e g contaminants in the solid phase slow response time pump rate capacity etc are all factors which may affect the safety of the operator and or quality of the data Field instrumentation is invaluable during initial site surveys for assessing the potential hazards that exist Information of this nature is needed in order to determine the degree of protection required for personnel or to provide direction for further quantification of specific parameters Instruments such as portable oxygen indicators and combustible gas detectors would be the instruments of choice when a general safety assessment of an unknown atmosphere is necessary Such atmospheres present many hazards including oxygen deficiency explosivity flammability etc and data obtained with these instruments can be used by the onsite safety officer to generally assess the presence of these dangers and dic
180. hygiene practices and or techniques These include stain detector tubes and personnel collection devices Detection by these methods is the most specific of all of the devices thus far described These methods are therefore extremely useful for compound identification and quantification 4 3 Section 4 2 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Stain detector tubes such as manufactured by National Drager Matheson Kitagawa Bendix Corporation and MSA provide an immediate indicator of a specific chemical or species of interest They are somewhat limited due to small sample volume interferences degree of accuracy operator judgement etc however they are valuable as a quick relatively simple direct reading method of determining specific gas concentrations Collection devices such as solid sorbents chemical absorbing solutions and filters are the most accurate of the methods used for properly identifying and quantifying species of interest Use of these methods requires adherence to very specific procedures and conditions of the type found in the NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods EPA Federal Reference Methods or specific papers documenting procedures and characteristics of sorbent resins Collected samples are subsequently analyzed at an offsite analytical laboratory that usually yields an analytical precision and accuracy presently unavailable in most field applications It should be noted at this point that ambient monitoring within the cont
181. ic exposure to dangerous toxic chemicals and this dictates that protective sample collection methods be used to minimize personnel exposure In addition instrumentation and equipment must be safe for use in the atmospheres in which they are being operated Decontamination Because of the nature of the materials being sampled the option of using disposable sampling equipment must be considered since attempting field cleanup efforts may be impractical Ease of Operation Hazardous waste site investigations and response actions at environment threatening spills generally require some level of hazard protection that may be cumbersome limit the field of vision or fatigue the sampler Sample collection procedures must therefore be relatively simple to follow expedite sample procurement and to reduce the chance of fatigue Collection and monitoring equipment should be simple to operate direct reading and should not be unwieldy Section 1 1 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 These and other factors associated with the procurement of hazardous waste samples need to be addressed in a compilation of practical cost effective and reliable methods and procedures capable of yielding representative samples for a diverse number of potential parameters and chemical matrices These methods must be consonant with a variety of analytical considerations running the gamut from gross compatibility analyses pH flammability water reactivity etc to highly
182. ical laboratory after the sample has arrived All collected samples including duplicates and field blanks should be completely filled in with a minimum of the following information Project Code Assigned by the 9 Location Number Document Control Officer DCO Date of Collection e Time of Collection e Location Description e Signature of Sampler 0 5 Appendix D Revision 0 Page 6 of 11 Lab Sample Number Assigned by the Analytical Laboratory e Remarks Section An example of an appropriate sample collection tag and analysis tag is shown in Figure D 1 respectively After sample analysis and appropriate quality assurance checks have been made original sample collection tags are to be stored in a document file maintained by the DCO and the tag serial number is recorded in a master log for future reference Maintaining such files and records is an important aspect of sample traceability and provides a needed cross referencing tool that can be used to correlate any one of the identifying numbers and sources e g collection tag laboratory number master log etc with a specific sampl e Chai n of Custody Forms There are many transfers of custody during the course of a sampling program from time of collection through final sample disposition and al samples should be accompanied by a Chain of Custody Record to document these transfers In some instances such as in the collection of air samples on solid sorbents it be
183. ical to maintain an effective seal around the tubing 4 Lower intake to near bottom and attach outlet to monitor inlet 5 Proceed with instrument operation according to Methods 11 1 through 8 or the instrument operator s manual Note When using adsorption technique for qualification quantification Sisk recommends a sample rate of 1 Ipm for 5 to 30 minutes through Tenax GC see Method IV 7 4 64 Source 0797090 0 e Y eta c t Na uc et ee ete at ee URS SS Sw o o0 OO A Ww tee oo er 2 0 Md gt BIS on a e ve M WS Reference 40 Figure 4 8 Gas GAS SAMPLING VALVES Mr METAL CAP CEMENT GROUT CAP GRAVEL PACKING GAS COLLECTION PORT sampling well Section 4 3 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 Section 4 3 2 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 6 Gradually raise the intake tubing while observing the instrument readings T Record readings then remove probe and close casing If instrument fails to return to background level replace sample inlet tube before Proceeding to next well Note Sometimes vapors may condense on the lower portion of the sample tube merely cutting off the bottom several centimeters of the intake tube may remove the source of contamination and allow reuse of the remaining sample tube Sources Hatayama H R Special Sampling Techniques Used for Investigating Unc
184. ication must be shown on the container as required in 173 24 173 31 173 32 173 33 and 173 34 C 22 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 23 of 23 REUSE OF CONTAINERS Some steel containers in the DOT Series DOT 17C 17 and 17H may be qualified for reuse by a reconditioner of drums who is registered with the Department of Transportation These drums must meet the requirements of 173 28 m i e old labels removed exemption number if any and descriptive markings removed and the drum reconditioned Other containers may be reused under varying conditions See 173 28 for details CARGO HEATERS Cargo heaters authorized for use with flammable liquid or gas must be marked in accordance with 177 834 1 2 e and f MOTOR VEHICLES Marking of motor vehicles and special requirements are found in 177 823 and 177 824 SPECIFICATION CONTAINERS Markings on specification containers must generally identify 1 the DOT specifica tion number to which the container is made Parts 178 and 179 2 the manufacturers name and address or symbol registered with the Associate Director for the Office of Hazardous Material Regulation Duplicate symbols are not authorized All containers must comply with the marking requirements of 173 24 and the appropriate Section s of Parts 178 and 179 Exceptions for Canadian and other import export situations may be found in 8171 12 and 173 8 NOTE For certain containers specific detailed inform
185. ies of the Agency Mention of trade names or commercial products does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use FOREWORD Available Sampling Methods is part of a multivolume manual entitled Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites A Methods Manual developed by the U S Environmental Protection Agency sampling methods document is dedi cated to sampling procedures and sampling information only and is meant to be used in conjunction with two companion documents that address general site characterization approaches and available laboratory analytical methods for sample analysis The sampling volume describes a collection of methods and materials sufficient to address most sampling situations that arise during routine waste site and hazardous spill investigations The methods are com piled with detailed practical information to provide field investigators with a set of functional operating procedures The first companion volume Integrated Approach to Hazardous Waste Site Characterization includes discussions on preliminary assessment initial data evaluation administrative procedures offsite reconnaissance site inspection chain of custody quality assurance safety and training in addition to con siderations concerning sampling strategy and methods selection The second Companion document Available Laboratory Analytical Methods outlines detailed methodology suitable for hazardous waste analysis and is organized by m
186. igrams 1 board foot 12 1 xt2in x tha en qmone 0 0023 ounce Suck mi moons oa benat 1 pound per foot 1 488 kg per meter e _____ 1 metric ton 1000 kilograms 1 0 how tonne ied hour 0 300 cu per min A tons hand pie abe 1 oj ft per sec 646 316 gallons per 1 stato mile mi 5200 1 kg 1000 grams 40 03 1 009 2 205 pounds ein 1 test 12 inches 1 1000 milligrams mg 1 gallon per min gt 0 00144 millon 7 30 46 e M gione gar day tack 25 40 milimetrs Ve mia 0 308 meter por soc 11g por meter 0 672 pound per Density weight volume 1 square foot 144 taf per 0 6624 eu m por 0 0029 sq _ 1 por aR 18 02 io rr m ee Volume 1 grain per cu fl 2 208 grams per cu m 1 meters 27 1 US 17 11 am uw cs cee PEL a s m 1726 win eum perky R per D ima 28 32 ers 16 percum 0 0824 D per cu R cee 7 48 U S gallons pram per cu 0 437 grain per cu R 39 37 aches 1 inch MID C e Cnm f sec 196 9 R per min CT 3785 tes Water at 62 16 7 C Bic 1 cubic foot 623 Weight 0 1337 ou ft 1 pound 0 91004 105 tong 2240 pounds 10 5 barrel 420 5 gallons 105 gaion 6M 1016 petroleum 35 inperial gallo
187. immersed in water Before use remove the electrodes from the water and rinse with distilled or demineralized water Dry the electrodes by gently blotting with a soft tissue Standardize the instrument with the electrodes immersed in a buffer solution with a pH approaching that of the sample and note the temperature of the buffer and the pH at the measured temperature Remove the electrodes from the buffer rinse thoroughly and blot dry Immerse in a second buffer approximately 3 pH units different from the first and note the temperature of the buffer and the pH at the measured temperature the reading should be within 0 1 unit of the pH for the second buffer Rinse electrodes thoroughly blot dry and immerse in the sample Agitate the sample sufficiently to provide homogeneity and keep solids in suspension If the sample temperature is different from that of the buffers let the electrodes equilibrate with the sample Measure the sample temperature and set the temperature compensator on the pH meter to the measured temperature Note and record the pH and temperature Rinse electrodes and immerse in water until the next measurement A 34 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 35 of 52 When only occasional pH measurements are made standardize the instrument before each measurement Where frequent measurements are made less frequent standardization every 1 or 2 hours is satisfactory However if sample pH values vary widely standardize more freque
188. in close proximity to the well is probably not representative of the overall groundwater quality at that sampling site This is due to the possible presence of drilling contaminants near the well and because important environmental conditions such as the oxidation reduction potential may differ drastically near the well from the conditions in the surrounding water bearing materials For these reasons it is highly desirable that a well be pumped or bailed until the well is thoroughly flushed of standing water and contains fresh water from the aquifer The recommended amount of purging before sampling is dependent on many factors including the characteristics of the well the hydrogeological nature of the aquifer the type of sampling equipment being used and the parameters being sampled A common procedure is to pump or bail the well until a minimum of two 2 to ten 10 bore volumes have been removed Gibb notes that removing all water from the well bore is only possible if the well is pumped dry and suggests two alternative approaches a monitor the water level in the well while pumping When the water level has stabilized most if not all of the water being pumped is coming from the aquifer b monitor the temperature conductivity or pH of the water while pumping When these parameters stabilize it is probable that little or no water from casing storage is being pumped The use of an indicating analysis such as pH temperature redox pot
189. ing the sample container The method is advantageous when the sample might be significantly altered during transfer from a collection vessel into another container This is the case with samples collected for oil and grease analysis since considerable material may adhere to the sample transfer container and as a result produce inaccurately low analytical results Similarly the transfer of a liquid into a small sample container for volatile organic analysis if not done carefully could result in significant aeration and resultant loss of volatile species Though simple representative and generally free from substantial material disturbances it has significant shortcomings when applied to a hazardous waste since the external surface of each container would then need to be decontaminated In general the use of a sampling device either disposable or constructed of a nonreactive material such as glass stainless steel or Teflon is the most prudent method The device should have a capacity of at least 500 ml if possible to minimize the number of times the liquid must be disturbed thus reducing agitation of any sedi ment layers l liter stainless steel beaker with pour spout and handle works well It is easily cleaned and considerably less expensive than Teflon Though still more expensive than other plastics it is more durable and generally more inert under field conditions Also useful are large stainless steel ice scoops and ladles available
190. ing and shipping procedures and in general to identify and assure the traceability of generated samples Custody procedures trace the sample from collection through any custody transfers and finally to the analytical facility at which point internal laboratory procedures take over Chain of custody is also necessary to document measures taken to prevent and or detect tampering with samples sampling equipment or the media to be sampled A detailed description of Document Control Chain of Custody Procedures can be found in Appendix D and in Volume Section 2 Safety A more detailed discussion of safety considerations can be found in Volume Section 3 and Volume IV pending release of Volume IV refer to Interim Standard Operating Safety Guides Revised September 1982 These considerations should be carefully reviewed before engaging in any hazardous waste sampling endeavors It is important however that safety be generally discussed at this time to provide a necessary reminder of the importance of taking proper well developed precautions when dealing with hazardous materials Decontamination Procedures Decontamination procedures are designed to provide two primary safeguards Prevent the movement of contaminated materials into noncontami nated areas Insure that samples collected during the investigation are not exposed to additional contamination from onsite materials or sampling equi pment Proper decontamination is no
191. ing of Airborne Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons Using Glass Fiber Filters and Polyurethane Foam Atmos Environ 15 6 1981 4 75 37 38 39 40 41 Section 4 5 Revision 0 Page 4 of 4 Federal Register Appendix B Reference Method for the Determination of Suspended Particulate in the Atmosphere High Volume Method 40 CFR 50 1971 Jackson D and R G Lewis Polyurethane Foam and Selected Sorbents as Collection Media for Airborne Pesticides and Polychlorinated Biphenyls In Sampling and Analysis of Toxic Organics in the Atmosphere ASTM STP 721 pp 36 47 1980 Flower F B Case History of Landfill Gas Movement through Soils In The Proceedings of the Research Symposium Gas and Leachate from Landfills at Cook College Rutgers University New Jersey March 25 and 26 1975 U S EPA 600 9 76 004 1976 pp 177 189 Hatayama J R Special Sampling Techniques Used for Investigating Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites in California In National Conference on Management of Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites Hazardous Materials Control Research Institute Silver Springs Maryland 1981 Synder E M E Tonkin A McKissick and M Alton Development of Hazardous Toxic Wastes Analytical Screening Procedures Part Atlantic Research Corporation ADA 095 506 1980 Section 5 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 SECTION 5 0 21 RADI ATI ON 5 1 GENERAL Radiation monitoring should be one
192. instruments rely on the ability of radiation to cause ionization each differs in its sensitivity i e its ability to detect different types and varying intensities of radiation Basically there are four main groups of ionizing radiation types These include heavy positively charged particles such as alpha particles protons deuterons tritions and possibly mesons each of which exhibit similar mechanisms of interaction with matter beta particles including both positrons and electrons electromagnetic radiation including x ray and gamma radiation and neutrons Section 5 1 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 For the purposes of this section however only alpha beta and gamma radiation will be discussed as they are the types most likely to be encountered at a hazardous waste site Alpha particles are characterized as a charged particle having two protons and two neutrons and due to this large mass and charge in addition to high velocity have a high probability of interacting or colliding with orbital electrons and atomic nuclei They have a limited tissue penetration ability however since this type of radiation tends to lose its energy over short distances It is therefore easy to shield against and poses little threat outside of the human body However due to its high specific ionization alpha radiation is capable of totally destroying cellular material if it is able to locate within the body e g by ingestion inha
193. inted or in label form on the side of the cylinder or on a tag wired to the cylinder valve protector Appendix C Revision 0 Page 10 of 23 e Poisonous Liquid n o s NA1955 or Poisonous Gas 5 1955 Laboratory name and address e DOT label Poisonous Gas even if sample is liquid on cylinder 3 Put all information on metal cylinder on outside container 4 Print Laboratory Sample and Inside Packages Comply With Prescribed Specifications on top and or front of outside container Mark This Side Up on top of contaner and upward pointing arrows on all four sides Shipping Papers 1 Use abbreviations only as specified 2 Complete carrier provided bill of lading and sign certification statement if carrier does not provide use standard industry form Provide following information in order listed One form may be used for more than one exterior container 9 Poisonous Liquid n o s 1955 e Net weight or net volume weight or volume may be abbreviated just before or just after Poisonous Liquid n o s 1955 3 Include chain of custody record properly executed in container or with cylinder if legal use of samples is required or anticipated 4 For EPA employees accompany shipping container to carrier and if required open outside container s for inspection Transportation L Transport unknown hazardous substance samples classified as poison A only by ground transport o
194. iods Sampling time selection will therefore be site specific and obviously dependent upon a number of unique factors Installation of Clean Filter 1 Remove faceplate by loosening the four wing nuts and rotating the bolts outward 2 Obtain a clean weighed filter and record the filter number high volume sampler serial number flowmeter serial number location run date and start time on the data sheet 3 Carefully place the clean filter rough side up on the wire screen and center the filter so that when the faceplate is in position the gasket will form a tight seal on the outside edge of the filter 4 Replace faceplate being careful not to move the filter and tighten the wing nuts evenly until the gasket forms an airtight seal against the filter b Operation Checks 1 Allow sampler motor to warm up at least 5 minutes to reach normal operating temperature 2 Assure that the flow recorder is connected to the sampler using the same tubing as was used to calibrate the sampler 3 Place a new chart on the recorder and set at correct start ti 4 Record Run Start time and date site identification and sampler number on the chart Turn sampler off and set clock switch to desired setting Total suspended particulate samples are normally collected over a 24 hour period however this requirement may be altered depending on monitoring applications 4 59 Section 4 2 9 Revision 0 Page
195. ion This may cause a loss of radioactivity and possible contamination of subsequent samples due to reuse of inadequately cleansed containers Appendix A Revision 0 Page 40 of 52 Silica Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Collect samples in bottles of polyethylene plastic only do not use glassware for any sample handling Store samples at 4 C All samples must be analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control If samples are stored in glass silica may leach into the sample and raise concentrations therefore glassware cannot be used Appendix A Revision 0 Page 41 of 52 Solids Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Store samples at 4 C Samples must be analyzed within the following times according to the analysis to be performed Dissolved 7 days Volatile Dissolved 7 days Suspended 7 days Volatile Suspended 7 days Total 7 days Volatile Total 7 days Settleable 48 hours Quality Control Sample should be analyzed as soon as possible after collection for best results Exclude unrepresentative particles such as leaves sticks or large solids Glass bottles are desirable Plastic bottles are satisfactory provided that the material in suspension in the sample does not adhere to the walls of the container Store samples that are likely to contain iron
196. ion exists each capable of responding to different types and levels of ionizing radiation The procedure delineated below is therefore purposely general and simply outlines common instrument features and operational steps It is by no means meant to replace the instrument instruction manual but is only meant to serve as a supplemental guide Uses Radiation survey instruments are used to detect the presence of radioactive sources They are useful when making decisions concerning personal safety determining levels of contamination and meeting transportation and disposal requirements Procedures for Use 1 Choose an instrument or interchangeable detector tube which is consistent with the investigative requirements 2 Turn selector switch to the standby the warm up position and allow instrument to warm up for 1 2 minutes 3 Turn instrument selector switch to battery check position and check battery strength 4 Turn range selector switch to appropriate scale factor e g 100X 10X 1X 0 1 and check or calibrate instrument with a radioactive check source if available Note At a minimum Coleman type lantern mantles may be used as a check source Lantern mantles are treated with a substance containing radioactive Thorium oxide 5 Turn audio switch on if desired 6 Choose needle response fast slow response 7 Turn range selector to most sensitive setting and determine natural background radiation 0 01 0 02 mR hr
197. ion until it or the derived data is introduced as evidence in legal proceedings Custody records should therefore trace a sample from its collection through all transfers of custody until it is delivered to the analytical laboratory At this point internal laboratory records should document sample custody until its final disposition In order to establish that a sample is valid it is also necessary to document the measures taken to prevent and or detect tampering either to the sample itself the sampling equipment used or the environment sampled This is done by the use of evidence tape locks and custody seals and documented entries noting their condition in field and laboratory log books The custody record must document any tampering that may have occurred the absence of any such comments indicates no tampering observed or noticed during the period of custody Since it may not always be possible to know ahead of time if a sample will be used as evidence in future legal actions it is a good common sense practice to institute a proper chain of custody in all instances Use of such practices as standard operating procedures on a project to project basis will contribute to the consistency and quality of the generated data Sample ldentification Preprinted preserialized sample collection tags are recommended to identify samples collected for shipment to the analytical laboratory Specific analysis tags may also be issued by the analyt
198. ion for 8 12 hours Recharging batteries prior to expiration of the specified interval will insure operation while on a site More than any other factor effective utilization of unit requires operator with full understanding of operating principles and procedures for the specific instrument in use 4 6 Section 4 2 1 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Sources Edmont Model 60 400 Combustible Gas Oxygen Monitor Instruction Manual Manufactured by Energetic Science Elmsford NY 10523 U S Environmental Protection Agency Hazardous Materials Response Operations Training Manual National Training and Operational Center Cincinnati OH 4 7 Section 4 2 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 4 4 2 2 METHOD IV 2 DETERMINATION OF COMBUSTIBLE GAS LEVELS USING A PORTABLE COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATOR Discussion A combustible gas indicator consists of three primary components the sensor hotwire catalytic solid state etc Signal processor and readout display Sample is introduced to the sensor either by diffusion into a passive sensor or by pumping The sensor produces a signal which is processed and displayed as the ratio of the combustible gas present to the total required to reach the lower explosion limit LEL The lower explosive limit also LFL lower flammability limit is defined as the lowest concentration of gas or vapor in air which can be ignited by an ignition source and cause an explosion or flame propagation Conversely the upper
199. ion line from a peristaltic pump Discrete samples can be collected from various depths then combined or analyzed separately If the depth of the vessel is greater than the lift capacity of the pump an at depth water sampler such as the Kemmerer type discussed in Method 111 4 or the ASTM Bomb Bacon Bomb may be required In situations where the reactive nature of the contents are known a small submersible pump may be used Wien sampling a previously sealed vessel a check should be made for the presence of a bottom sludge This is easily accomplished by measuring the depth to apparent bottom then comparing it to the known interior depth Methods for sampling a bottom sludge are found in Section 2 3 The sampling of drums for hazardous liquid wastes is a very taxing situation with present equipment The most widely used method is a glass tube 6 mm to 16 mm I D that is lowered into the drum The top of the tube is sealed with a stopper or the thumb and the tube withdrawn The bottom of the tube is then placed over a glass jar the stopper removed from the top and the contents drained into the containers After collection of sufficient sample the tube is then broken up into the drum This method is simple relatively inexpensive and quick and collects a sample without having to decontaminate equipment It does however have serious drawbacks Most low density fluids do not hold well in the glass tubes A great deal of the potential sample flows ou
200. ion of the sample at the time of collection or in the period before examination The sampling bottle shall be kept unopened until the moment it is to be filled Remove the stopper and hood or cap as a unit taking care to avoid soiling During sampling do not handle the stopper or cap and neck of the bottle and protect them from contamination Hold the bottle near the base fill it without rinsing replace the stopper or cap immediately and secure the hood around the neck of the bottle Store samples at 4 C All samples should be analyzed within 6 hours of collection Quality Control The bacteriological examination of a water sample should be started promptly after collection to avoid unpredictable changes The ti me and temperature of storage of all samples should be recorded and should be considered in the interpretation of data A 5 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 6 of 52 Bicarbonate Carbonate Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Bicarbonate Carbonate analysis should be performed onsite If onsite determination is not possible completely fill the sample bottle leaving no headspace and return it to the laboratory as quickly as possible for analysis Store sample at 4 C until analyzed Quality Control Carbon dioxide may be lost or gained during sampling and storage Sample bottles must be capped and sealed tightly avoiding sample agitation or
201. ion which meets the requirements in Sec 172 204 of this subchapter The certification is not required for shipments to be transported en tirely by pri Vat Carriage and For to be transported in a cargo tank supplied by the carrier 5 177 817 c 3 Interlining with carriers by rail A motor carrier shall mark on the shipping paper required by this section if it offers or delivers a freight container or transport vehicle to a rail carrier for further transportation Sec 177 817 c a A description of the freight container or transport vehicle and b The kind of placard affixed to the freight container or transport vehicle 4 This subpart does not apply to materials classed as ORM A B C or D 5 Accessibility of shipping papers The driver and each carrier using the vehicle shall ensure that the shipping paper isreadily available and recognizable by authorities in the case of an accident or inspection See Sec 177 817 e for details B ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION FOR SHIPPING PAPERS A 172 203 h For additional descriptions or Anhydrous ammonia see Sec Liquefied petroleum gas see Sec 172 203 h 2 and Exemptions see Sec 172 203 10 SHIPPER S CERTIFICATI ON Sec 172 204 A GENERAL Except B and D below 1 Except as provided im paragraphs b and c of Sec 172 204 each person who offers a hazardous material for transportation shall certify that the material offered for transportation is im accordance
202. ion with air on a volume volume basis Several standards can be injected into one vial to make a multi component standard to save calibration time Care should be taken in component selection to prevent the resultant chromatograms from being too complex to determine individual compound responses To extract a portion of the vapor penetrate the septum with a clean syringe and fill to the desired volume Remove the syringe and the standard is ready for injection into the chromatography Total volume removed should not exceed 1 ml Volumes in excess of 1 ml will detrimentally effect reproducibility of standards 4 21 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 6 of 14 2 Sample Collection Samples can be collected and introduced into the GC by either of two basic techniques direct injection with a gas tight syringe or when so equipped through the gas sampling loop An air sample can be obtained with a gas tight syringe at the sampling site The syringe is filled and emptied several times in the contaminated atmosphere The syringe is filled once again and the sample is carried off site to an area where the GC is set up for field analysis The sample can then be injected into the GC column a chromatogram produced and further qualitative quantitative analysis performed Sample volumes of 10 pl to 1 ml can be used Syringes may become contaminated if high concentrations of organics are encountered If a gas tight syringe becomes contaminated the easie
203. ions of contaminants is however greater in contained vessels and as a result there is the potential for detector saturation and fouling It is advisable to place any instruments used in this role in their highest operating range Flame ionization detectors that utilize the sample gas stream as their combustion air may have insufficient oxygen for combustion and will likely require use of a dilution probe The introduction of entrained droplets from the container contents should also be avoided Careful handling of the extension tube to avoid close contact with the materials surface and in some instances the use of a glass wool filter plug will prevent material buildup in the probe and detector Procedures for Use 1 Select an appropriate monitoring instument or device that will Characterize the gas if present A combustible gas detector hydrocarbon vapor analyzer or stain detector tube is normally used Be particularly aware of the limitations of the instrument in use 2 Attach the proper size and length tubing that will reach into the container The tubing seal with the monitoring instrument should be leak tight 3 Insert tubing into container or vessel opening and operate instrument as per Methods IV 1 through IV 8 and the appropriate operators manual Section 4 4 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 4 4 4 2 METHOD V 13 SAMPLING OF HEADSPACE GASES IN SEALED VESSELS Discussion Sealed vessels especially 55 gallon drums present problems
204. ipment to used in hazardous atmospheres associated with underground mining These atmospheres usually contain methane gas and coal dust hence the tests and certification are specific to those two contaminants Often the same monitoring equipment is used both in mines and above ground and would carry more than one certification such as FM and MSHA To ensure personnel safety it is recommended that only approved FM or UL instruments be used onsite and only in atmospheres for which they have been certified When investigating incidents involving unknown hazards the monitoring instruments should be rated for use in the most hazardous locations following points will assist in selection of equipment that will not contribute to ignition of a hazardous atmosphere e an area desigated Division 1 there is a greater probability of generating a hazardous atmosphere than in Division 2 Therefore the test protocols for Division 1 certification are more stringent than those for Division 2 Thus a device approved for Division 1 is also permitted for use in Division 2 but not vice versa For most response work this means that devices approved for Class vapors gases Division 1 areas of ignitable concentrations Groups A B C D should be chosen whenever possible At a mini mum an instrument should be approved for use in Division 2 locations All instruments to be used in methane environment should be approved by the Mine
205. ir Monitoring at Hazardous Waste Sites for Volatile and Semi Volatile Organic Compounds using Tenax and Polyurethane Foam Sorbents Contract No 68 02 3168 April 1983 Walling J F and T A Hartlage Standard Operating Procedure for Sampling Gaseous Organic Air Pollutants for Quantitative Analysis using Tenax EMSL RTP SOP EMD 18 Revision 0 February 1982 Berkley R J Bumgarner D Driscoll C Morris L Wright Standard Operating Procedure for the GC MS Determination of Volatile Organic Compounds Collected on Tenax GC Sorbent Cartridges Semi Automated Data Processing EMSL RTP SOP EMD 014 Revision 1 August 1982 GCA Corporation Quality Assurance Plan Love Canal Study Appendix A Sampling Procedures EPA Contract 68 02 3168 GCA Corporation Quality Assurance Plan Love Canal Study Appendix B Laboratory Procedures EPA Contract 68 02 3168 Pellizzari E D B H Carpenter J E Bunch and E Sawicki Collection and Analysis of Trace Organic Vapor Pollutants in Ambient Atmospheres Environmental Science and Technology 9 556 1975 Pellizzari E D J E Bunch R E Berkindey and J McRay Collection and Analysis of Trace Organic Vapor Pollutants in Ambient Atmospheres Performance of a Tenax GC Cartridge Sampler for Hazardous Vapors Anal Letters 9 45 63 1976 Jonsson and S Berg Determination of 1 2 Dibromoethane 1 2 Dichloroethane and Benzene in Ambient Air Using Porous Polymer Traps and Ga
206. ir source either bottled gas or a small DC powered compressor Pumps are available that can sample from depths of 250 ft Flow rates vary with models but range from about 2 0 gpm at 25 ft to 0 5 gpm at 150 ft At least one model is capable of 0 78 gpm at 250 ft Once the well has been sufficiently purged the actual sampling should begin as soon as the water level begins to approach its pre purge level Sampling for volatile organics may begin even sooner before substantial volatilization begins If recovery is very slow it may be necessary to wait several hours or even until the following day before sufficient volume is available for all the necessary analyses In this instance a volatile organics sample set may be collected soon after completion of the purging process and a second set with the remaining samples When a pump is used for sample collection its rate should be controlled if possible to closely match the transmissivity of the formation Excessive draw down of the well during sampling may result in nonrepresentative samples due to changes in groundwater flow Bailers are probably the simplest means of collecting groundwater samples They result in a minimum of sample disturbance if carefully handled They can be constructed of noncontaminating materials and their low relative cost makes the use of a separate device for each well practical thus eliminating in field 3 30 Section 3 4 Revision 0 Page 7 of 7 Cleaning
207. itoring pumps are available from a number of vendors and range in sophistication and accordingly price from very simple models to programmable ones capable of compensating for increasing pressure differential in addition to other features Care should be taken to select a pump capable of operating in the desired flow rate range and which has features most likely to be used by the investigator Due to the wide range of volatility and breakthrough volumes of compounds amenable to this method it is recommended that samples be collected at widely different flow rates and therefore different volumes This approach wil guard against analytical system overload and breakthrough of the more volatile organics while at the same time maintaining maximum sensitivity for all compounds To achieve this four 4 samplers are placed at each desired location and run for a specified time period usually 4 8 hours As a general guideline one sampler should be operated within each of the following ranges Flow Rate Range Total Volume 10 20 cc min 5 10 liters 20 40 cc min 10 20 liters 40 80 cc min 20 40 liters 80 160 cc min 40 80 liters This approach is based upon Standard Operating Procedures SOPS in use at EPA s Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory EMSL at Research Triangle Park RTP North Carolina It is highly recommended for those cases where little is known about the compounds and concentrations present at a given site The procedure
208. ix A Check that a Teflon liner is present in cap if required Secure the cap tightly Label the sample bottle with an appropriate tag Be sure to complete the tag with all necessary information Complete chai n of custody documents and field logbook Allow system to drain then disassemble Return tubing to lab for decontamination See Appendix E for general decontamination procedures Section 3 5 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 3 5 REFERENCES 1 United States Department of the Interior National Handbook of Recommended Methods for Water Data Acquisition Reston Virginia 1977 deVera R B P Simmons N D Stephen and D L Storm Samplers and Sampling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams 600 2 80 018 Instrument Specialties Company Instruction Manual Model 2100 Wastewater Sampler Lincoln Nebraska January 1980 National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement Inc A Guide to Groundwater Sampling Technical Bulletin No 362 Madison New York January 1982 McNabb J F and G E Mallord Introduction to Subsurface Microbiology and Sampling Problems Presented at the American Society for Microbiology Annual Meeting Miami Beach Florida May 1980 calf J J F McNabb W Dunlap R Crosby and J Fryberger Manual for Groundwater Sampling Procedures R 5 Kerr Environmental Research Laboratory Office of Research and Development Ada OK 1980 Sisk S W Manual for
209. ize See discussion on wel purging in Section 3 4 Groundwater 1 After pumping monitor water level recovery Recovery rate may be useful in determining sample rate Section 3 4 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 3 4 2 METHOD 111 8 PURGING WITH A GAS PRESSURE DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM Discussion A pressure displacement system consists of a chamber equipped with a gas inlet line a water discharge line and two check valves see Figure 3 7 When the chamber is lowered into the casing water floods it from the bottom through the check valve Once full a gas i e nitrogen or air is forced into the top of the chamber sufficient to result in the upward displacement of the water out the discharge tube The check valve in the bottom prevents water from being forced back into the casing and the upper check valve prevents water from flowing back into the chamber when the gas pressure is released This cycle can be repeated as necessary until purging is complete Uses The pressure lift system is particularly useful when the well depth is beyond the capability of a peristaltic pump The water is displaced up the discharge tube by the increased gas pressure above the water level The potential for increased gas diffusion into the water makes this system unsuitable for sampling for volatile organic or most pH critical parameters Procedures for Use 1 Using clean noncontaminating equipment i e an electronic level indicator avoid indicating paste
210. l aid in the orderly transfer of field information to the proper laboratory personnel and insure that each sample receives only the specified analyses Shipping arrangements if necessary must be agreed to in advance Selection of a carrier delivery times and billing procedures must be mutually acceptable Preservation requirements and equipment decontamination procedures should be specified This would include specific recommendations reagents and cleaning solvents A field and a laboratory coordinator should be designated from both groups to serve as points of communication In most situations the laboratory will specify the number and type of Quality Assurance Quality Control samples Should this decision be made by field personnel information regarding these samples must be transmitted to the Laboratory s QA QC director Failure to properly coordinate these activities can result in complete data loss or at a minimum a reduction in its quality and overall reliability Either of these outcomes translates into potentially significant waste of time and money Coordination with Other Subcontractor Efforts Many investigations require the services of a team of subcontractors These include Drilling Contractors Geophysical Investigation Teams Aerial Photographic Contractors and Trade Contractors electricians plumbers carpenters and fencing contractors It is the FTL s responsibility to coordinate their activities i
211. l alcohol Ethyl acetate Ethyl acrylate inhibited Ethyl diamine Ethylene dichloride Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether Gasoline Heptanes Hexanes Isoprene Isopropyl ether Mesityl oxide Methane natural gas Methanol methyl alcohol 3 Methyl 1 butanol isoamyl alcohol Methyl ethyl ketone Methyl isobutyl ketone 2 Methyl 1 isobutyl alcohol 2 Methyl 2 propanol tertiary butyl alcohol Octanes Petroleum napht ha Pentanes 1 Pentanol amyl alcohol Propane 1 Propanol propyl alcohol 2 Propanol isopropyl alcohol Propylene Pyridine Styrene Tol uene Vinyl acetate Vinyl chloride Xylenes EZESENSERERESESSEEESESEUESEREREEZZEEESNEEERSSEESUESESEZEEESEENSEENNWNERRENZEESEZEZENZEEZCEEMNEENENENEEESESEXEXEXZ A saturated hydrocarbon mixture boiling in the range 20 135 C 68 275 F Also known by the synonyms benzine ligroin petroleum ether or naphtha Source National Electrical Code Vol 70 Table 500 2 National Fire Protection Association 470 Atlantic Avenue Boston MA 02210 1981 4 Appendix F Revision 0 Page 5 of 7 CONTROLS Three methods exist to prevent a potential ignition source from igniting a flammable atmosphere Explosion proof Encase the ignition source in a rigidly built container Explosion proof instruments allow the flammable atmosphere to enter If and when an arc is generated the ensuing explosion is contained within the specially designe
212. lation etc Beta particles are negatively charged particles that can be construed as high speed electrons In contrast with electrons however beta particles orginate in the nucleus They exhibit medium specific ionization and penetration when compared to alpha particles Although they pose a greater external body threat than alpha beta particles of low energy are usually stopped by the horny dead layers of the skin Beta particles with enough energy to penetrate the basal layer of the epidermis however still pose an external threat They can be shielded by a few millimeters of aluminum and like alpha particles generally present a greater threat if their source is located inside the body Gamma radiation is a type of electromagnetic radiation of nuclear origin with a zero rest mass and no charge It has the lowest specific ionization of the three classifications and possesses the ability to penetrate tissue for great distances It therefore constitutes the greatest external radiation hazard in comparison to alpha and beta as it is capable of deep penetration within the body and is a threat to all organs For this reason gamma radiation is the most routinely monitored radiation type at hazardous waste sites and environmental spills 5 2 Section 5 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 5 2 PERSONNEL MONI TORS Although no specific method is outlined in this manual for personnel radiation monitors this is best covered by individual manufacturer
213. le information other markings on sample container type of sample etc should then document the situation on the custody record and in his project logbook and notify the project QA Manager by the fastest available means followed by written notification Changes may be written in the Remarks section of the Custody record and should be initialed and dated A copy of this record should accompany the written notification to the QA Manager Appendix E Revision 0 Page 1 of 11 APPENDIX E DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES Source Interim Standard Operating Safety Guides Revised September 1982 Office of Emergency and Remedial Response 1 Appendix Revision 0 NTRODUCTI ON Page 2 of 11 Personnel responding to hazardous substance incidents may become contaminated in a number of ways including Contacting vapors gases mists or particulate in the air e Being splashed by materials while sampling or opening containers Walking through puddles of liquids or on contaminated soil e Using contaminated instruments or equipment Protective clothing and respirators help prevent the wearer from becoming contaminated or inhaling contaminants while good work practices help reduce contamination on protective clothing instruments and equipment Even with these safeguards contamination may occur Harmful materials can be transferred into clean areas exposing unprotected personnel Or in removing contaminated clothing per
214. les They are about 61 to 100 cm long and 1 27 to 2 54 cm in diameter They can be purchased readily from laboratory supply houses A laboratory scoop or garden variety trowel can also be used to sample bulk material The trowel looks like a small shovel The blade is usually about 7 by 13 cm with a sharp tip A laboratory scoop is similar to the trowel but the blade is usually more curved and has a closed upper end to permit the containment of material Scoops come in different sizes and shapes Stainless steel or polypropylene scoops with 7 by 15 cm blades are preferred A trowel can be bought from hardware stores the scoop can be bought from laboratory supply houses Uses The use of the trier is similar to that of the grain sampler discussed in Method 11 8 It is preferred over the grain sampler when the powdered or granular material to be sampled is moist or sticky The trowel or lab scoop can be used in some cases for sampling dry granular or powdered material in bins or other shallow containers The lab scoop is a superior choice since it is usually made of materials less subject to corrosion or chemical reactions Procedures for Use 1 Insert the precleaned trier into the waste material at a 0 to 45 angle from horizontal This orientation minimizes the spillage of sample from the sampler Extraction of samples might require tilting of the containers 2 Rotate the trier once or twice to cut a core of material 3 Slowly withdra
215. lete chain of custody log and the field logbook Optional Method if sample of bottom sludge is desired 1 2 Remove cover from container opening Insert glass tubing slowly almost to the bottom of the container Try to keep at least 30 cm of tubing above the top of the container Allow the waste in the drum to reach its natural level in the tube Gently push the tube towards the bottom of the drum into the sludge layer Do not force it Cap the top of the tube with a safely gloved thumb or rubber stopper Carefully remove the capped tube from the drum and insert the uncapped end in the sample container Release the thumb or stopper on the tube and allow the sample container to fill to approximately 90 percent of its capacity If necessary the sludge plug in the bottom of the tube can be dislodged with the aid of a stainless steel laboratory spatula Repeat if more volume is needed to fill sample container and recap the tube Proceed as in Steps 9 through 14 above If a reaction is observed when the glass tube is inserted violent agitation smoke light heat etc the investigator should leave the area immediately If the glass tube becomes cloudy or smokey after insertion into the drum the presence of hydrofluoric acid is indicated and a comparable length of rigid plastic tubing should be used to collect the sample 3 21 Section 3 3 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 3 3 2 METHOD 111 6 SAMPLING CONTAINERIZED W
216. limit can be extended by decreasing the number of pump volumes and the lower range limt can be extended by increasing the number of pump volumes Tubes and pumps of different manufacturers should not be used interchangeably For example Drager tubes should be used only with Drager pumps Dragerwerk Ag Lubeck Detector Tube Handbook Air Investigations and Technical Gas Analysis with Drager Tubes 4th Edition August 1979 Matheson Safety Products Operating Instructions for Matheson Kitagawa Detector Tubes Matheson Gas Products Model 8014 Toxic Gas Detector Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 1 of 13 4 2 7 METHOD 1V 7 SAMPLING FOR VOLATILE ORGANICS IN AMBIENT AIR USING SOLID SORBENTS Discussion Solid sorbent cartridges can be used quite successfully to collect samples of volatile organics in ambient air and workplace environments The sample apparatus consists of a sampling cartridge packed with a solid sorbent of desirable characteristics e g Tenax GC activated charcoal XAD 2 and a pump system capable of maintaining a constant flow rate across the collection media for a specified period of time In principle organic vapors present in the air are adsorbed on the collection media and subsequently desorbed thermally or chemically in the laboratory An aliquot of the desorbed sample is then subjected to chromatographic analysis either capillary or packed column followed by flame ionization or mass spectrometric detec
217. ling period observe rotameter level low flow indicator to determine if flow rate has been maintained Shut down sampling pump and record all pertinent information counter reading time barometric pressure relative humidity ambient temperature problems comments etc The final flow rate should not deviate from the initial flow rate by more than 5 f Remove PUF cartridge use clean gloves and wrap it with hexane rinsed aluminum foil 1 Place foil covered cartridge in a hexane rinsed glass bottle or culture tube that has been properly labeled Plugs of glass wool are placed below and above the cartridge and the tube is tightly capped The tube should be gently shaken to insure that the cartridge does not rattle inside the culture tube h Place sample identification tag on sample bottle or culture tube and fill out chain of custody form Calculate total sample volume at standard conditions as in Method V 7 Sources GCA Corporation Quality Assurance Plan Love Canal Study Appendix A Sampling Procedures Contract 68 02 3168 Lewis Robert G and MacLeod Kathryn E Portable Sampler for Pesticides and Semivolatile Industrial Organic Chemicals in Air X Analytical Chemistry Volume 54 pp 310 315 1982 GCA Corporation Guidelines for Air Monitoring at Hazardous Waste Sites for Volatile and Semivolatile Organic Compounds Using Tenax and Polyurethane Foam Sorbents Contract 68 02 3168
218. ment of Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites Washington D C 1981 Williams R B Sample Substrate Core Sampler Lab Pratt 29 6 637 1980 6 3 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 1 of 52 APPENDIX A SAMPLE CONTAI NERI ZATI ON AND PRESERVATI ON MI Appendix A Revision 0 Page 2 of 52 Acidity and Alkalinity Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene borosilicate glass Pyrex or equivalent bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Fill sample bottles completely and cap tightly Store samples at 4 C All samples should be analyzed within 14 days of collection Quality Control Dissolved gases contributing to acidity or alkalinity such as carbon dioxide hydrogen sulfide or ammonia may be lost or gained during sampling or storage Sample bottles must be capped and sealed tightly avoiding sample agitation or prolonged exposure to air 2 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 3 of 52 Asbestos Apparatus and Materials l liter Polyethylene bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling Leave air space at the top of the sample container to allow for Shaking the sample Avoid contacting the sample with acid If the sample cannot be filtered within 48 hours of collection add 1 m of a 2 71 percent solution of mercuric chloride per liter of sample to prevent bacterial growth Store at 4 C Quality Control The sample bottle should be rinsed at least twice with the water tha
219. must be selected in consultation with an experienced chemist Establishment of Procedures Once decontamination procedures have been established all personnel requiring decontamination must be given precise instructions and practice if necessary Compliance must be frequently checked The time it takes for decontamination must be ascertained Personnel wearing SCBAs must leave their work area with sufficient air to walk to CRC and go through decontamination CONTAMINATION DURING MEDICAL EMERGENCIES Basic Considerations Part of overall planning for incident response is managing medical emergencies The plan should provide for e Some response team members fully trained in first aid and CPR Arrangements with the nearest medical facility for transportation and treatment of injured and for treatment of personnel suffering from exposure to chemicals Consultation services with a toxicologist e Emergency eye washes showers and or wash stations First aid kits blankets stretcher and resuscitator In addition the plan should have established methods for decontami nating personnel with medical problems and injuries There is the possibility that the decontamination may aggravate or cause more serious health effects If prompt life saving first aid and or medical treatment is required decontamination procedures should be omitted Whenever possible response personnel should accompany contaminated victims to the medical facili
220. nd 173 24 the outside container must be marked in accordance with 173 25 EXAMPLES THIS SIDE UP or THIS END UP or INSIDE PACKAGES COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS CYLINDERS All cylinders must be marked in accordance with 173 34 and 8173 301 through 173 306 Cylinders passing reinspection and retesting must be marked in accordance with 173 34 e 6 21 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 22 of 23 PORTABLE TANKS 172 326 and 172 332 Portable tanks must display the proper shipping name in letters at least 2 inches high and placed on two opposite sides Identification numbers 8171 101 and 171 102 when authorized are required on each side and each end for capacities of 1 000 gallons or more and on two opposing sides in association with the proper shipping name for capacities of less than 1 000 gallons The name of the owner or lessee must be displayed Tanks carrying compressed gases DOT 51 must have all inlets and outlets except safety relief valves marked to designate whether or not they communicate with vapor or liquid 178 245 6 b NOTE When different hazardous materials are transported in marked portable tanks the shipping name and the identification number displayed must identify the material CARGO TANKS HIGHWAY COMPRESSED GASES 172 328 Cargo tanks must be marked in letters no less than 2 inches high with either the proper shipping name of the gas or an appropriate common name such as Ref
221. nd removed from the guide assembly as outlined below Pull drilling mechanism away from container until the drill bit clears the ball valve Close ball valve b Loosen nut containing Teflon seal E Unscrew bolts holding drill assembly to mounting plate d Remove drill assembly from mounting plate pulling drill bit through Teflon seal Remove cross fitting as unit from ball valve The remaining mounting plate and ball valve serve as a permanent seal until the container can be disposed of properly 4 71 Section 4 4 2 Revision 0 Page 4 of 4 Sources Snyder Roger Tonkin Martha E McKissick Alton M Development of Hazardous Toxic Wastes Analytical Screening Procedures Atlantic Research Corporation July 1980 Section 4 5 Revision 0 Page 1 of 4 4 5 REFERENCES 1 Spittler T M and A W Oi Ambient Monitoring for Specific Volatile Organics Using a Sensitive Portable PID GC In Nationa Conference on Management of Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites Washington DC October 28 30 1981 U S Department of Health Education and Welfare NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods Volumes 1 7 DHEW NIOSH Publication No 79 141 August 1979 Spittler T M and A W Oi Ambient Monitoring for Specific Volatile Organics Using a Sensitive Portable PID GC Management of Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites Washington DC October 1981 Ecology and Environment Inc Field Investigations of Uncontrolled Hazardous W
222. nd the investigator must be cognizant of this when choosing monitoring methods and equipment Besides the obvious effects of temperature wind and precipitation in relation to dispersion and deposition of atmospheric pollutants heat and sunlight can dramatically increase rates of volatilization and cold and calm may cause stagnant conditions to prevail tending to reduce migration and to concentrate pollutants in low lying areas Accurate detection of atmospheric pollutants must take into account these and other factors if a successful sampling effort is desired Of major importance when discussing the sampling of ambient atmospheres is the use of portable analytical instrumentation In addition to being portable these devices need to be rugged and easy to operate and need to provide real time data in order to best meet the requirements inherent to field applications They must also be proven safe when used in hazardous waste environments Electrical devices and instruments which use flame or combustion principles must be of a type that eliminate the possibility of igniting combustible atmospheres All instruments used should be approved or certified by Underwriters Laboratory UL or Factory Mutual Systems FM according to provisions set forth by the National Electrical Code NEC A detailed discussion of the various electrical product certification programs is presented in Appendix F In addition this appendix contains an explanation of t
223. not compromise the intended analytical procedures Procedures for Use 1 Inspect the corer for proper precleaning and select sample location 2 Force corer in with smooth continuous motion 3 Twist corer then withdraw in a single smooth motion 4 Remove nosepiece and withdraw sample into a stainless steel or Teflon tray 5 Transfer sample into an appropriate sample bottle with a stainless steel lab spoon or equivalent 6 Check that a Teflon liner is present in cap if required Secure the cap tightly The chemical preservation of solids is generally not recommended Refrigeration is usually the best approach supplemented by a minimal holding time Appendix A Sample Containerization and Preservation should be consulted for specific requirements 1 Label the sample bottle with the appropriate sample tag Be sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Complete all chain of custody documents and record in the field logbook Decontaminate sampling equipment after use and between sample locations as required by procedures in Appendix Decontamination 2 10 Section 2 3 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 CHECK VALVE OPTIONAL CORE CATCHER OPTIONAL NOSEPIECE Figure 2 2 Hand corer 2 11 Section 2 3 3 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 2 3 3 METHOD 11 5 SAMPLING BOTTOM SLUDGES OR SEDIMENTS WITH A GRAVITY CORER Discussion A gravity corer is a metal tube with a replacement taper
224. ns 10 5 short ton 2000 pounds 1 cubic meter 1000 liters Water at 39 2 F 4 C 07 m 35 31 maximum density 1 pound b 1 Mor 1000cc 1 aubic foot 4b 0 454 i la 1 cubic meter 1000 kg a 0 0525 pound 0 2642 U S gallon 1 pound 0 01002 cu ft 28 35 pms 61 0 cu in tite 10 Thgpercum gram per ier 14 696 Ib per sq in 1 foot head of 0 433 per sq n Y pail per thousand 1 033 kg per sq water 1 mo per liter 1 amosphere 1 kg per sq 1 m head of water 0 1 hg per sq om 1 part per million 4metric 10 000 kg persqm tin hadot 0 491 8 33 b per mation gal 14 22 per sq in 1 m head of 1 t grain per gel 143 ib per mation gai 1 per square foot 0 1924 in of water poet 1B per gat 0 12 pom 4 88 kg per sqm His ad per head of water 1b per gal 0 007 gran per galon 15 per square 2 036 in of 0 2048 b per sq 1 por 7120 ppm iach did Mem gt 735 5 mm of mercury ed COM NS 1422 per qe 0 0703 kg per sq UM 0 711 ton per sq Pressure TEN te these ry er tel sue 1 mossured mil 1 NO 29 92 in meters and motors of water t 99 2 F 4 mercury with density Tinch Need of 5208 per sa ft and inches millimeters smi meters of mer 12 505 arms pes cc woter
225. nsure adherence to the sampling plan or contractual requirements Here again thorough recordkeeping and documentation is critical Implementation of the Safety Plan The Safety Plan must be implemented prior to full scale mobilization of onsite activities This would include establishing decontamination stations command posts first aid stations etc If the scope of the investigation is large the FTL should designate a Site Safety Officer to implement the safety plan l 15 Section 1 6 Revision 1 Page 3 of 3 Volume Section 3 discusses the basic aspects of a Safety Plan Volume IV will provide details on the preparation and provisions of safety plans however until release of this document this information is contained in the Interim Standard Operation Safety Guides September 1982 U S EPA OERR Implementation of the QA QC Plan The QA QC Plan must address all phases of the investigation including field measurements laboratory analysis subcontractor activities documentation recordkeeping and report preparation As with the Safety Plan the complexity and time demands of this task increase with the overall project complexity Therefore on larger projects the FTL may designate a QA QC officer The FTL must be familiar with the terms of the QA QC Plan and insure that they are implemented by all field and laboratory personnel Of particular concern to the FTL are document control and chain of custody procedures As stated
226. ntly with a buffer having a pH within 1 to 2 pH units of that sample Measure with two or more buffers of different pH at least once daily and more frequently if samples contain abrasive solids or dissolved fluorides in order to check the linearity of response When electrode response to two buffers 3 pH units apart show differences greater than 0 1 pH unit replace the glass electrode Measurements of pH in high purity waters such as condensate or demineralizer effluents are subject to atmospheric contamination and require special procedures for accurate pH measurement Quality Control The glass electrode is relatively free from interference from color turbidity colloidal matter oxidants reductants or high salinity except for a sodium error at high pH This error at a pH above 10 may be reduced by using low sodium error electrodes When using ordinary glass electrodes make approximate corrections for the sodium error in accordance with information supplied by the manufacturer Temperature exerts two significant effects on pH measurement The pH potential i e the change in potential per pH unit varies with temperature and ionization in the sample also varies The first effect can be overcome by a temperature compensation adjustment provided on the better commercial instruments The second effect is inherent in the sample and is taken into consideration by recording both the temperature and pH of each sample Appendix A Re
227. nts and bulk materials 2 Section 2 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 2 2 SOILS Soil sampling is an important adjunct to groundwater monitoring Sampling of the soil horizons above the groundwater table can detect contaminants before they have migrated into the water table and can help establish the amount of contamination sorbed on aquifer solids that have the potential of contributing to the groundwater contamination Soil types can vary considerably on a hazardous waste site These variations along with vegetation can effect the rate of contaminant migration through the soil It is important therefore that a detailed record be maintained during sampling operations particularly of location depth and such characteristics as grain size color and odor and or readings obtained on field monitoring equipment Subsurface conditions are often stable on a daily basis and may demonstrate only slight seasonal variation especially with respect to temperature available oxygen and light penetration Changes in any of these conditions can radically alter the rate of chemical reactions or the activity of associated microbiological community As a result samples should be kept at their at depth temperature or lower protected from direct light sealed tightly in glass bottles and analyzed as soon as possible The physical properties of the soil its grain size cohesiveness associated moisture and such factors as depth to bedrock and water table
228. of contamination The samples must be iced or refrigerated from the time of collection until extraction All samples must be extracted within 7 days and completely analyzed within 30 days of collection Quality Control Standard quality assurance practices should be used with this method Appendix A Revision 0 Page 34 of 52 Hydrogen lon pH Apparatus and Materials Polyethylene or glass bottles Electronic pH meter with temperature compensation adjustment Glass electrode Glass electrodes are available for measurement over the entire pH range Use minimum sodium ion error type electrodes for high pH high sodium samples Reference electrode Use calomel silver silver chloride or other constant potential electrode Standard buffer solutions of known pH Sample Collection Preservation and Handling The electrometric measurement of pH is the only method approved by EPA The determination should be made onsite The maximum holding time for any sample is 2 hours Because of the difference between the many makes and models of commercially available pH meters it is impossible to provide detailed instructions for the proper operation of every instrument In each case follow the manufacturer s instructions Thoroughly wet the glass and reference electrodes by immersing the tips in water overnight or in accordance with instructions Thereafter when the meter is not in use for pH measurement keep the tips of the electrodes
229. oid skin contact with well water The depth to the water level in the well must be measured in order to calculate the liquid bore volume for prepurging and is also important to any hydrological interpretations of the analytical results Depths to water are normally measured with respect to the top of casing as in well depth determinations Several methods are available including 1 the electric sounder 2 the chalked steel tape and 3 the popper The electric sounder although not the most accurate is recommended for initial site work because of the minimal potential for equipment contamination and simplicity of use Sounders usually consist of a conductivity cell at the end of a graduated wire and a battery powered buzzer When the cell contacts the water the increased conductivity completes the circuit and allows current to flow to the alarm buzzer The depth to water can then be read from the graduations on the wire or the wire can be measured directly This device may not be suitable for use if a potentially flammable or explosive layer is present in the well unless it is an intrinsically safe version A discussion of electrical product certification is presented in Appendix F The chalked steel tape is a more accurate device for measuring static water levels Coat the lower 0 5 to 1 0 meters of a steel measuring tape on either side with either carpenter s chalk or any of the various indicating pastes Attach a weight to the lower en
230. ok and complete the chain of custody documents Properly clean and decontaminate the equipment prior to reuse or storage using recommended guidelines of Appendix deVera E R Simmons B P Stephens R D and Storm D L Samplers and Sampling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams EPA 600 2 80 018 January 1980 GCA Corporation Quality Assurance Plan Love Canal Study Appendix A Sampling Procedures EPA Contract 68 02 3168 3 9 Section 3 2 3 Revision 0 Page 1 of 4 3 2 3 METHOD 111 3 PERISTALTIC PUMP FOR SAMPLING SURFACE WATER BODIES Discussion This collection system consists of a peristaltic pump capable of achieving a pump rate of 1 to 3 Ipm and an assortment of Teflon tubing for extending the suction intake A battery operated pump is preferable as it eliminates the need for DC generators or AC inverters Uses The system as shown in Figures 3 2 and 3 3 is highly versatile It is portable and the sample collection is conducted through essentially chemically nonreactive material It is practical for a wide range of applications including streams ponds and containers This procedure can both extend the lateral reach of the sampler and allow sampling from depth Likewise it can function both as a well purge and a sample collection system The chief disadvantage of this method is the limited lift capacity of the pump approximately 8 meters Procedures for Use 1 Install clean medical grade silicone
231. ollected using the simple laboratory scoop or garden type trowel specified in Method 11 1 This method is more applicable to sludges but it can be used for sediments provided the water depth is very shallow a few centimeters It should be noted however that this method can be disruptive to the water sediment interface and might cause substantial alterations in sample integrity if extreme care is not exercised The stainless steel laboratory scoop is generally recommended due to its noncorrosive nature Single grab samples may be collected or if the area in question is large it can be divided into grids and multiple samples can be collected and composite Uses This method provides for a simple quick and easy means of collecting a disturbed sample of a sludge or sediment Procedures for Use 1 Sketch the sample area or note recognizable features for future reference 2 Insert scoop or trowel into material and remove sample In the case of sludges exposed to air it may be desirable to remove the first 1 2 cm of material prior to collecting sample 3 If compositing a series of grab samples use a stainless steel mixing bowl or Teflon tray for mixing 4 Transfer sample into an appropriate sample bottle with a stainless steel lab spoon or equivalent 5 Check that a Teflon liner is present in cap if required Secure the cap tightly The chemical preservation of solids is generally not recommended Refrigeration is usually the best
232. oluene ionization potential 8 8 eV will respond strongly when ionized by a 9 5 eV lamp while n heptane 10 08 eV will exhibit a greatly reduced response To assist in lamp selection a listing of ionization potentials for various compounds is typically included in the owner s manual The instruments listed below have been designed to be field portable or are easily adaptable to field use e g by addition of a battery pack or small gas cylinders Century Systems Model 0VA 138 Organic Vapor Analyzer OVA The 0VA 128 has two models a survey mode to provide nonspecific quantitation and or detection of organic vapors described more fully in Method IV 3 and GC mode in which a gas chromatography column is attached to the detector to possibly provide identification of the vapor constituents The OVA utilizes a flame ionization detector FID which in the survey mode will yield sensitivities to 0 1 ppm methane The instrument maintains its own power and gas supplies Model 10A10 Photovac This system uses a PID with a fixed ionization potential Sensitivities to 0 1 ppb for certain compounds have been 4 18 Uses Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 Page 3 of 14 reported The system is almost completely self contained with internal power and gas supplies with only a strip chart recorder external to the main body of the instrument HNu Model 301 Gas Chromatography This unit is essentially a compact laboratory instrument which
233. on 0 Page 3 of 11 TABLE 0 1 DOCUMENTS SUB TO CONTROL Project Work Plan Project Logbooks Field Logbooks Sample Data Sheets Sample Tags Chai n of Custody Records Laboratory Logbooks Laboratory Data Calculations Graphs etc Sample Checkout Sample Inventory Internal Memos External Written Communication Confidential Information Photographs Drawings Maps Quality Assurance Plan Litigation Document Final Report D 3 Appendix D Revison 0 Page 4 of 11 TABLE D 2 SUGGESTED DOCUMENT CODES Document Code letter Project Work Plans A Project Logbooks B Sampling Logbooks C Sampling Data Sheets 01 D2 ett Sampling Coding Form E Laboratory Notebooks 6 Laboratory Data Sheets Hl H2 etc Sample Logs LI 12 etc Internal Memos M External Written Communication N Confidential Information 0 Photos Maps Drawings P QA Plan Q Reports R Final Report FR Miscellaneous X ee ee ee a a ee ee SSSR SSS SSS SSS SS STATS SSS SSS D 4 Appendix D Revision 0 Page 5 of 11 CHAI N CUSTODY The primary need for the implementation of chain of custody procedures stems from the possibility that a sample or a piece of data derived from the collection of a sample will be used as physical evidence in an enforcement action The purpose of chain of custody in these instances is to trace the possession of a sample from the time of collect
234. onal groups such as Underwriters Laboratories UL Factory Mutual FM and the American National Standards Institute ANSI together with NFPA have developed test protocols for certifying explosion proof intrinsically safe or purged devices to meet minimum standards of acceptance An electrical device certified under one of these test methods carries a permanently affixed plate showing the logo of the laboratory granting certification and the Class es Division s and Group s it was tested against Figure F 1 F 5 Appendix F Revision 0 Page 6 of 7 Combustible Gas and 0 Alarm rU model 260 part no 449900 bara Safe for use In hazardous locations Class 1 Division 1 Groups C and D and Nondnceridive for use in Class 1 Division 2 Groups B C and D when used with MSA Battery Part 457839 MUST BE OPERATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH INSTRUCTIONS MFO BY MINE SAFETY APPLIANCES COMPANY PIT TSGURGH PENNSYLVANIA U S A 15208 579 V S NO 3 092 790 PATENTED CANABA 1065 Figure F 1 Example Device Certification Plate Certification means that if a device is certified as explosion proof intrinsically safe or purged for a given Class Division and Group and is used maintained and serviced according to the manufacturer s instructions it will not contribute to ignition The device is not however certified for use in atmospheres other than those indicated Any manufactur
235. onization detector PID will respond to most vaporous compounds in air that have an ionization potential less than or equal to that supplied by the ionizing source in the detector an ultraviolet lamp The magnitude of this response is a function of the detector sensitivity and the concentration and ionization properties of the individual compound Though it can be calibrated to a particular compound the instrument cannot distinguish between detectable compounds in a mixture of gases and therefore indicates an integrated response which is a function of the response factors and concentrations of all ionizable species present The analyzer employs the principle of photoionization for detection This process is termed photoionization since the absorption of ultraviolet light a photon by a molecule leads to ionization as shown in the equation RH hz e where RH trace gas h a photon with an energy gt Ionization Potential of RH The sensor consists of a sealed ultraviolet light source that emits photons which are energetic enough to ionize many trace species particularly organics but do not ionize the major components of air such as 0 N CO CO or HO chamber adjacent to the ultraviolet source contains a pair of electrodes When a positive potential is applied to one electrode the field created drives any ions formed by absorption of UV light to the collector electrode where the current proportional to concentration is measure
236. ontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites in California In National Conference on Management of Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites Hazardous Material Control Research Institute Silver Springs Maryland 1981 Section 4 4 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 4 4 HEADSPACE GASES Headspace gases are the accumulated gaseous components found above solid or liquid layers in closed vessels These gases may be the result of volatilization degradation or chemical reaction Poorly ventilated or partially sealed areas can also act to concentrate gas vapors Component concentrations normally exceed those found in ambient measurements Therefore the previously described ambient methods must be modified for handling these higher concentrations and for the remote sensing of container contents The anticipated higher concentrations can be dealt with by altering the instrument detector range reducing the sample gas flow rate into the instrument or utilizing a sample dilution system These techniques are necessary for the prevention of saturation poisoning and or gross deterioration of the detector element When lengthy extensions are used one must also take into account increased time lags for instrument response Most ambient measurement devices have sample intakes which are highly directional and localized The use of an extension will allow the operator to obtain samples from varying depths and distances within containers while maintaining a safe position Headspace
237. ord in the field logbook 13 Consult Appendix E Decontamination for appropriate decontamination procedures to be used on sampling equipment after use and between sampling locations Sources American Public Health Association Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 14th Edition American Public Health Association Washington D C 1975 Lind Owen T Handbook of Common Methods in Limnology C V Mosby Company St Louis 1974 2 17 Section 2 4 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 2 4 BULK MATERIALS Unlike soils which are heterogeneous associations of earthen and manufactured substances bulk materials are generally a homogeneous collection of a single identifiable product They are usually contained in bags drums or hoppers although on occasion large amounts of the material may be piled directly on the ground either deliberately or as the result of a spill Those surfaces exposed to the atmosphere may undergo some chemical alteration or degradation and should be avoided during sample collection Since the process producing the bulk material may demonstrate some variation with respect to time it is advisable to collect a series of samples as one composite to represent the material Bulk materials in an unconsolidated state may be readily collected by a stainless steel scoop When the amount of the material is large a composite can be collected by the use of a grain thief see Figure 2 6 This device is ess
238. oroethane 1 1 1 Trichloroethane Benzene Carbon tetrachloride Di 1 2 Dichloropropane Tri chloroethene 1 1 2 Trichloroethane 2 3 Dichlorobutane Bromotrichl oromethane Toluene 1 3 Dichloropropane 1 2 Dibromethane Tetrachloroethene Chlorobenzene 1 2 Di bromopropane Ni trobenzene Acetophenone Benzonitrite Iso propyl benzene p Isopropyltol uene 1 Bromo 3 chloropropane Ethyl benzene Bromoform Ethenyl benzene o Xylene 1 1 2 2 Tetrachloroethane Bromobenzene Benzal dehyde Pentachl oroethane 4 Chlorostyrene 3 Chl oro 1 propene 1 4 Di chl orobutone 1 2 3 Trichloropropane 1 1 Dichloroethane 2 Chl orobutane Chloroethyl vinyl ether 1 1 1 2 Tetrachloroethane Di oxane Epi chlorohydron 1 3 Di chl orobutane p Dichlorobenzene cis 1 4 Dichloro 2 butene n Butyl benzene 3 4 Di chloro 1 butene 1 3 5 Tri methyl benzene Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 5 of 15 TABLE 4 6 LITERATURE SUMMARY VOLATILE ORGANICS AMENABLE TO COLLECTION BY TENAX SORBENT CARTI DGES Component Reference s N Nitroso dimethyl amine 17 R Propiolactone 17 Ethyl methansulfonate 17 Nitromethane 17 Gl yci dal dehyde 17 Butadiene diepoxide 17 Styrene Epoxide 17 Aniline 17 Bis chloromethyl ether 17 Bis 2 chloromethyl ether 17 Diethyl Sulfate 18 Acrolein 18 Propylene Oxide 18 Cyclohexene Oxide 18 Styrene Oxide 18 Acetophenone 18 7 Met hanol 20 Ethanol 20 Propanol 20 Ethyl Acetate
239. packed in ice For EPA employees accompany shipping containers to carrier and if required open outside container s for inspection For overnight package services determine weight restrictions at least One service limits weight to 70 pounds per package SAMPLES CLASSIFIED AS POISON Collect samples in a polyethylene or glass container with an outer diameter narrower than the valve hole on a DOT specification No 3A1800 or No 3AA1800 metal cylinder To prevent leakage fill container no more than 90 percent full at 130 F Seal sample container Complete sample identification tag and attach securely to sample container Attach string or flexible wire to neck of the sample container lower it into metal cylinder partially filled with noncombustible absorbent cushioning material for example diatomaceous earth or vermiculite Place only one container in a metal cylinder Pack with enough absorbing material between the bottom and sides of the sample container and the metal cylinder to prevent breakage and absorb leakage After the cushioning material is in place drop the end of the string or wire into the cylinder valve hole Replace valve torque to 250 ft lb for l inch opening and replace valve protector on metal cylinder using Teflon tape Place one or more cylinders in a sturdy outside container Marking Labeling 1 2 Use abbreviations only where specified Place following information either hand pr
240. particulate associated organic compounds may volatilize off the particulate and onto the backup sorbent during collection giving higher than actual vapor base measurements and lower than actual particulate associated measurements The listing supplied in Table 4 8 will aid investigators in determining the applicability of this sampling method to their particular application Potential users are cautioned that method validation studies for many of the compounds listed including determination of collection efficiencies resorption recoveries etc have not been conducted The investigator should keep in mind that the procedure described herein is meant in its broadest application to be a screening technique and is therefore necessarily general If specific conditions compounds of interest concentrations detection requirements etc are known such factors should be carefully considered and the appropriate literature sources reviewed to optimize procedures relevant to specific needs For instance use of a cartridge composed of a PUF adsorbent resin sandwich has been described by Lewis and McLeod which may be useful in collecting compounds with low PUF breakthrough volumes Procedures for Use 1 Calibrate the sampling pump as per the procedure outlined in Method IV 7 Adjust pumps to a target flow rate of 3 to 4 liters minute 2 Sampling procedures Assemble sampling train see Figure 4 4 Set train up at desired location an
241. phere divisions classes and groups for which these products are tested Some combustible gas monitors provide readouts in units of percent LEL some in percent combustible gases by volume and some have scales for both Many situations may occur where the types of combustible gases to he encountered are unknown In such instances the more explosive the calibration gas the lower the LEL the more sensitive the indication of explosivity and thus the greater the margin of safety The operator should be familiar with 4 8 Section 4 2 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 4 the LEL concentrations for specific gases to effectively use instruments that provide data in percent combustible by volume only Although monitors can be purchased that are factory calibrated using gases such as butane pentane natural gas or petroleum vapors methane calibration is the most common The LEL of methane is 5 percent by volume in air therefore an air mixture containing 5 percent methane will be read as 100 percent LEL and will be explosive if a source of ignition is present When combustible gases other than methane are sampled the relative response of the detector for these other gases must be considered Recalibration to other gases may be possible see manufacturers recommendations The relative sensitivity of the detector and the differences in LEL for different gases will produce varying meter responses equal concentrations of different gases Actual correlation equ
242. pheres e Continuous Those existing continuously in an open unconfined area during normal operating conditions Confined Those existing in closed containers systems or piping where only ruptures leaks or other failures result in a hazardous atmosphere outside the closed system There are six possible environments in which a hazardous atmosphere can be generated However not every type of control will prevent an ignition in every environment To adequately describe the characteristics of those environments and what controls can be used the National Electrical Code defines each characteristic Class is a category describing the type of flammable material that produces the hazardous atmosphere e Class is flammable vapors and gases such as gasoline and hydrogen Class is further divided into groups A B C and D on the basis of similar flammability characteristics Table F 1 Class 11 consists of combustible dusts like coal grain and is divided into groups E F and G e Class 111 is ignitable fibers such as produced by cotton milling Division is the term describing the location of generation and release of the flammable material Division 1 is a location where the generation and release are continuous intermittent or periodic into an open unconfined area under normal conditions Division 2 is a location where the generation and release are in closed systems or containers and only from ruptures
243. ple possesses the same qualities or properties as the material under consideration The degree of resemblance of the sample to the material in question is determined by the desired qualities under investigation and analytical techniques used Sample size This should be chosen carefully in respect to physical properties of the entire object and the requirements and or limitations of both sampling and analytical techniques Number and or the frequency of subsample Decisions on these considerations are based on what types of statistical information are desired and the nature of the material collected Maintenance of sample integrity The sample must retain the properties of the original medium conditions at the time of sampling through collection transport and delivery to the analyst Section 1 4 Revision 1 Page 1 of 3 1 4 TYPES OF SAMPLES Before defining the general sample types the nature of the media or materials under investigation must be discussed Materials can be divided into three basic groups as outlined in Figure 1 1 Of least concern to the sampler are homogeneous materials These materials are generally defined as having uniform composition throughout In this case any sample increment can be considered representative of the material On the other hand heterogeneous samples present problems to the sampler because of changes in the quality of the material over distance When discussing types of samples it
244. pler body wear proper gloves and protective clothing Section 3 2 4 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 MESSENGER UPPER STOPPER CHAIN CENTER ROD Cold gt O LOWER STOPPER BOTTOM DRAIN Figure 3 4 Modified Kemmerer sampler 3 15 10 11 12 Sources 0 Section 3 2 4 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Recover sample by grasping lower stopper and sampler body with one hand gloved and transfer sample by either a lifting top stopper with other hand and carefully pouring contents into sample bottles or b holding drain valve if present over sample bottle and opening valve Allow sample to flow slowly down side of sample bottle with mini mal disturbance Select sample bottles and preserve the sample if necessary as per guidelines in Appendix A Check that a Teflon liner is present in the cap if required Secure the cap tightly Label the sample bottle with an appropriate tag Be sure to complete the tag with all necessary information Record the information in the field logbook and complete all chain of custody records Decontaminate sampler and messenger or place in plastic bag for return to lab See Appendix E for general decontamination procedures Environmental Protection Agency Procedures Manual for Ground Water Monitoring at Solid Waste Disposal Facilities EPA 530 SW 611 August 1977 Section 3 3 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 3 3 CONTAINERIZED LIQUIDS The sampling of tanks cont
245. pounds by microbial action Collect about 500 ml of sample in a clean container Adjust the pH of the sample to about 2 by addition of 1 1 the container and invert once to mix check the pH with narrow range 1 4 to 2 8 pH paper Transfer the sample to a 40 ml vial as described below If residual chlorine is present add sodium thiosulfate to another sample container and fill as described below Alternatively the addition of the HgClo to the sampling vial approximately 12 mg per 40 ml vial has been found effective for inhibiting microbial action 29 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 30 of 52 The following procedures apply to sampling directly with the sample vial 1 Collect a single undisturbed sample of water for the analysis of volatile organics Submerge the sample vial just below the surface upside down and slowly invert Accomplish this task creating as little disturbance as possible 2 Allow the vial to fill and reach equilibrium with its surrounding reservoir for several seconds ji Place the cap over the mouth of the vial so that the septum is properly oriented and screw down the cap firmly 4 Invert the vial to discover any entrapped air bubbles If such is the case the sample will be discarded and another 40 ml vial selected and filled 5 Collect a replicate sample per instructions above Label the sample vials with the appropriate designated sample tag Place the properly labeled
246. pproved flow indicators rotameters have been shown to be subject to a variety of errors caused by physical damage dirt deposition and flow restrictions in connecting tubing Remove filter retaining plate from the sampler to be calibrated and place a clean filter in the filter holder b Attach the variable resistance orifice VRO to the sampler and position the orifice setting to full open Secure the VRO fal plate to insure an air tight seal with the orifice gasket Attach a slack tube manometer to the sampler unit ts Plug sampler into 120 volt source while checking manometer to insure that the orifice pressure drop does not exceed the range of the manometer Let the sampler run for about 5 minutes d Turn motor off and place a fresh chart on the unit The chart should include the following information high volume sampler identification date and time of calibration and operator s name The chart should be labeled Calibration Data Check the recorder for proper operation and zero the pen if necessary f Determine five approximately equally spaced intermediate points which provide pressure drops between the desired maximum and minimum operating point and record the following data on the calibration sheet 4 57 Section 4 2 9 Revision 0 Page 4 of 6 pressure drop from the manometer in H20 flow rate indicated on Dickson recorder liters mm min Repeat three points centralized in the vicinity of
247. quids if sampling is not done slowly Procedures for Use 1 Assemble the pond sampler Make sure that the sampling beaker and the bolts and nuts that secure the clamp to the pole are tightened properly 2 With proper protective garment and gear take grab samples by slowly submerging the precleaned beaker with minimal surface disturbance 3 Retrieve the pond sampler from the surface water with minimal disturbance 4 Remove the cap from the sample bottle and slightly tilt the mouth of the bottle below the dipper device edge Empty the sampler slowly allowing the sample stream to flow gently down the side of the bottle with minimal entry turbulence 6 Continue delivery of the sample until the bottle is almost completely filled 7 Select appropriate sample bottles and preserve the sample if necessary as per guidelines in Appendix A Check that Teflon liner is present in the cap if required Secure the cap tightly 3 7 Section 3 2 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 eae clamp Bolt hole lt Beaker stainless steel or disposable Pole telescoping aluminum heevy duty 250 450 cm 96 180 Source Reference 1 Figure 3 1 Pond sampler 3 8 10 Sources Section 3 2 2 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Label the sample bottle with an appropriate sample tag Be sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Record the information in the field logbo
248. r Government owned aircraft Do not use air cargo other common carrier aircraft or rented aircraft SAMPLE IDENTIFICATI ON The sample tag is the means for identifying and recording the sample and the pertinent information about it The sample tag should be legibly written and completed with an indelible pencil or waterproof ink The information should also be recorded in a logbook tag should be firmly affixed to the sample container As a minimum it should include C 10 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 11 of 23 Exact location of sample Time and date sample was collected Name of sampler and witnesses if necessary Project codes sample station number and identifying code if applicable Type of sample if known Hazardous substance or environmental sample Tag number if sequential tag system is used Laboratory number if applicable Any other pertinent information ATTACHMENT C 1 Appendix C Revision 0 US Department GUIDE FOR Page 12 of 23 of Yonsponianon Research and Special HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SHI PPI NG PAPERS Administration The d information has been abstracted from the Code of Federal Regulations Title 49 Parts 100 177 1 DEFINITIONS SHIPPING PAPER Sec 171 8 A shipping paper may be a shipping order bill of lading manifest or other shipping document serving a similar purpose containing the information required by Sec 172 202 172 203 and 172 204 B HAZARDOUS WASTE MANIFEST C
249. ransported the waste from the United States to a foreign destination with a notation of the date of departure from the United States and 5 Retained by the shipper generator and by the initial and each subsequent carrier for three 3 years from the date the waste was accepted by the initial carrier Each retained copy must bear all required and dates up to and including those entered by the next person who received the waste F The requirements of 5172 205 0 and 3 do not apply to a rail carrier when waste is delivered to a designated facility by railroad if 1 2 3 All of the information required to be entered on the manifest except generator and carrier identification numbers and the generator s certification is entered on the shipping paper carried in accordance with 174 26 c The delivering rail carrier obtains and retains a receipt for the waste that is dated by and bears the handwritten signature of the person representing the designated facility and A copy of the shipping paper is retained for three 3 years by each railroad transporting the waste G The person delivering a hazardous waste to an initial rail carrier shall send a copy of the manifest dated and signed by a representative of the rail carrier to the person representing the designated facility H hazardous waste manifest required by CFR Title 40 Part 262 containing all the infor mation required by CFR Title 49 Subpart C may h
250. regular intervals It is the most often employed sampling scheme however care must be exercised to avoid bias If for example there are periodic variations in the material to be sampled such that the systematic plan becomes partially phased with these variations bias will result A systematic sampling plan is often the end result of an approach that was begun as random due to the tendency of investigators to subdivide large sample areas into smaller increments before randomizing Stratified Sampling Data and background information made available from the preliminary site Survey prior investigations conducted on site and or experience with similar situations can be useful in reducing the number of samples needed to attain a specified precision Stratified sampling essentially involves the division of the sample population into groups based on knowledge of sample characteristics at these divisions The purpose of the approach is to increase the precision of the estimates made by sampling This objective should be met if the divisions are selected in such a manner that the units within each division are more homogeneous than the total population The procedure used basically involves handling each division in a simple random approach Judgment Sampling A certain amount of judgment often enters into any sampling approach In fact a biased approach is the one most often employed when the intent is to document the presence of contamination
251. rent points and combine the samples in the same container 9 Check that the Teflon liner is present in the cap if required Secure the cap tightly THe chemical preservation of solids is generally not recommended Refrigeration is usually the best approach supplemented by a minimal holding time Appendix A should be consulted for containerization and preservation requirements 2 22 Section 2 4 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 61 100 lt 26 40 1 27 2 54 cm 4 1 Source Reference 4 Figure 2 6 Grain thief 2 23 Section 2 4 2 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 10 Label the sample bottle with the appropriate sample tag Be sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Complete all chain of custody documents and record in the field logbook 11 Decontaminate equipment after use and between sampling locations using recommended techniques of Appendix Sources deVera E R Simmons B P Stephens R D and Storm D L Samplers and Sampling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams 600 2 80 018 January 1980 Horwitz W Sensel A Reynolds H and Parks D L editors Ani mal Feed Sampling Procedure In Official Methods of Analysis The Association of Official Analytical Chemists 12th Edition Washington D C 1979 Section 2 5 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 2 5 REFERENCES 1 Smith R and James The Sampling of Bulk Materials Analytical Scienc
252. repare pump system If insufficient recovery is noted allow additional time to collect samples on a periodic schedule which will allow recovery between samplings 4 Collect volatile organic analysis samples if required with bucket type bailer Method 111 9 5 Install clean medical grade silicon tubing in peristaltic pump head 6 Attach pump to required length of precleaned Teflon suction line and lower to midpoint of well screen if known or slightly below existing water level 1 Consider the first liter of liquid collected as a system NOTE If well yield is insufficient for required analysis this purge volume may be suitable for some less critical analysis Fill necessary sample bottles by allowing pump discharge to flow gently down the side of bottle with minimal entry turbulence Cap each bottle as filled 9 Select sample bottles and preserve the sample if necessary as per guidelines in Appendix A 3 38 Sources Section 3 4 4 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 Check that a Teflon liner is present in cap if required Secure the cap tightly Label the sample bottle with an appropriate tag Be sure to complete the tag with all necessary information Complete chain of custody documents and field logbook Allow system to drain then disassemble Return tubing to lab for decontami nati on See Appendix E for general decontamination procedures Dunlap W J McNabb J F Scalf M and Crosby L
253. requently sludges form as a result of settling of the higher density components of a liquid In this instance the sludge may still have a liquid layer above it When the liquid layer is sufficiently shallow the sludge may be scooped up by a device such as the pond sampler described in Section III Method 111 2 or preferably by using thin tube sampler as described in this section see Method 11 4 latter is preferable as it results in less sample disturbance and will also collect an aliquot of the overlying liquid thus preventing drying or excessive sample oxidation before analysis Sludges which develop in 55 gallon drums can usually be collected by employing the glass tubes used for the liquid portion sample Method 111 5 as a thin tube sampler The frictional forces which hold the sludge in the tube can be supplemented by maintaining a seal above the tube When the overlying layer is deep a small gravity corer such as those used in limnological studies will be useful Gravity corers such as Phlegers are easier to preclean and decontaminate than piston type corers If the sludge layer is shallow less than 30 centimeters corer penetration may damage the container liner or bottom In this instance a Ponar or Eckman grab may be applicable as grab samplers are generally capable of only a few centi meters of penetration Of the two Ponar grab samplers are more applicable to a wider range of sediments and sludges They penetrate deeper an
254. rer before penetration of the layer in question Place remaining core into sample container Check that a Teflon liner is present in the cap if required Secure the cap tightly The chemical preservation of solids is generally not recommended Refrigeration is usually the best approach Supplemented by a minimal holding time Consult Appendix A for containerization and preservation recommendations Label the sample bottle with the appropriate sample tag Be sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Complete all chain of custody documents and record in the field logbook Decontaminate sampling equipment after use and between sampling locations Refer to Appendix E for decontamination requirements deVera E R Simmons B P Stephens R D and Storm D L Samplers and Sampling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams EPA 600 2 80 018 January 1980 2 7 Section 2 3 Revision 0 Page 1 of 1 2 3 SLUDGES AND SEDI MENTS In general and for the purpose of this manual sludges will be defined as semi dry materials ranging from dewatered solids to high viscosity liquids Sediments are the deposited material underlying a body of water On occasion they are exposed by evaporation stream rerouting or other means of water loss In these instances they can be readily collected by soil or sludge collection methods Sludges can often be sampled by the use of a stainless steel scoop or trier F
255. ressed Gas gas mixture Cyanogen chloride Gas 13 1 C Cyanogen gas Gas Gas identification set Gas Ger mane Grenade with Poison A gas charge Hexaethyl tetraphosphate compressed gas mixture Gas Hydrocyanic acid prussic solution Li qui d Hydrocyanic acid liquified Gas Insecticide liquified gas containing Poison A or Gas Poison B material Methyl dichloroarsine Liquid Nitric oxide Gas Nitrogen peroxide Gas Nitrogen tetroxide Gas Nitrogen dioxide liquid Gas Parathion compressed gas mixture Gas Phosgene di phosgene Liquid Appendix C Revision 0 Page 6 of 23 Most poison A materials are gases or compressed gases and would not be found in drum type containers Liquid poison A s would be found only in closed containers All samples taken from closed drums do not have to Shipped as poison A s which provides for a worst case situation Based upon information available a judgment must be made whether a sample froma closed container is a poison A If poison A is eliminated as a shipment category the next two classifications are flammable or nonflammable gases Since few gas samples are collected flammable liquid would be the next applicable category With the elimination of radioactive material poison A flammable gas and nonflammable gas the sample can be classified as flammable liquid or solid and shipped accordingly These pro
256. rials Combustible Liquid in containers exceeding 100 gal capacity ORM B ORM A Combustible Liquid in containers having capacities of 110 gal or less ORM E 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 Definition CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR CFR 4 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 163 173 389 326 300 300 115 151 150 240 343 240 381 115 00 605 115 Appendix Revision 0 Page 4 of 23 DOT PRIORITY RANKING OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Application regulations 49 CFR 173 1 173 34 177 49 CFR 173 390 173 398 49 CFR 173 327 173 337 49 CFR 173 300 173 316 49 CFR 173 300 173 316 49 CFR 173 173 121 173 116 173 149a 119 49 CFR 173 152 173 239a 49 CFR 173 152 173 239a 49 CFR 173 241 173 299 49 CFR 173 344 173 379 49 CFR 173 241 173 299 49 CFR 173 381 173 385 49 CFR 173 116 173 118a 173 121 173 149a 49 CFR 173 862 173 510 173 800 49 CFR 173 655 173 510 173 605 49 CFR 173 116 173 118a 173 121 173 149a 49 CFR 173 510 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 5 of 23 TABLE C 2 DOT LIST OF CLASS A POISONS 49 CFR 172 101 Physical state at Material standard temperature Arsine Gas Bromoacetone Liquid Chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixture Gas Chloropicrin and nonflammable nonliquified comp
257. riety of chlorinated benzenes and phenols and is generally applicable to the measurement of such compounds in the ng m to pg m range when sensitive analytical techniques are employed GC Electron Capture These methods are generally not applicable for the more volatile organic compounds those exhibiting a vapor pressure of greater than 1 mm Hg 4 48 Section 4 2 8 Revision 0 Page 2 of 7 TABLE 4 8 ORGANIC COMPOUNDS COLLECTED IN AMBIENT AIR USING LOW VOLUME OR HIGH VOLUME POLYURETHANE FOAM SAMPLERS 24 25 26S 31 32 33 Polychlorinated biphenyls Aroclor 1221 Aroclor 1232 Aroclor 1242 Aroclor 1016 Aroclor 1248 Aroclor 1254 Aroclor 1260 32 34 33 25 50 35 Chlorinated pesticides achlordane p DDT ychlordane Endosul fan Chlordance technical Heptachl Mi rex Aldrin a BHC p BHC yBHC lindane 5 BHC p p DDD p p DDE Polychlorinated naphthalenes Halowax 1001 Halowax 1013 25 35 26 33 Chlorinated Benzenes 1 2 3 trichl orobenzene 1 2 3 4 tetrachl orobenzene Pentachl orobenzene Hexachlorobenzene Pentachloronitrobenzene Chlorinated phenols 2 4 5 trichloro phenol Pentachl orophenol continued TABLE 4 8 continued Section 4 2 8 Revision 0 Page 3 of 7 Herbicide Esters Esters Esters Esters Esters Organophosphorus pesticides Mevi nphos Di chlorvas Ronnel Chlorpyri pos Di azi non isopropyl butyl isobutyl i soethyl 32 25 24 32 34 Methyl para
258. rigerant Gas Cargo tanks must only be marked i e proper shipping name and identification number when authorized 8171 101 and 171 102 for the material contained therein DOT MC 331 tanks must have inlets and outlets except safety relief valves marked to designate whether they communicate with liquid or vapor when the tank is filled to its maxi mum per mitted silling density 178 337 9 c TANK CARS RAIL 172 330 Tank cars when required to be marked with the proper shipping name by Parts 173 and 179 must be marked in letters at least 4 inches high with at least 5 8 inch stroke with the proper shipping name or the appropriate common name Identification number markings when authorized must be displayed on each side and each end 58171 101 and 171 102 when authorized Tank cars must only marked for the material contained therein NOTE See referenced Sections for requirements for DOT 106 and DOT 110 tank car tanks EXAMPLE OF PLACARD AND PANEL WITH IDENTIFICATION NUMBER NOTE The Identification Number ID No may be displayed on placards or on orange panels on tanks Check the sides of the transport vehicle if the ID number is not displayed on the ends of the vehicle OTHER MARKING REQUIREMENTS REQUALIFIED CONTAINERS Reusable cylinders portable tanks cargo tanks and tank cars are required to be either visually inspected or retested at periodic intervals When this is accomplished the date of the requalif
259. ristics with respect to distance or depth Those portions which form boundaries with the container define the edges of a pile or contact the atmosphere do not necessarily represent the material as a whole Care must be exercised in order to prevent aeration or significant changes in moisture content Samples should be tightly Capped and protected from direct light Most commercially available solids sampling devices are steel brass or plastic In general use of stainless steel is the most practical and several manufacturers will fabricate their equipment with all stainless steel parts on a special order basis Another alternative is to have sampler contact surfaces Teflon coated This can be accomplished by either sending the device to a commercial coater or by in house application of spray on Teflon coatings Some devices especially those for soil sampling have traditionally been chrome or nickel plated steel These should be particularly avoided or the plating should be removed because scratches and flaking of the plating material can drastically effect the results of trace element analysis Plated or painted surfaces can be used in many cases if the outside coating is first removed by using abrasives Such practice can yield a significant cost savings over more expensive materials so long as the exposed material will affect the sample This section is divided into three subsections which address the sampling of soils sludge and sedime
260. rther documented in studies conducted by the National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement NCASI on a full scale model of a 2 inch PVC well They found that purging from just below the water surface insured a more complete removal of the casing water than by withdrawal from well below the surface It was also evident that when purging did occur from just below the surface satisfactory results could be obtained at any of a wide range of pumping rates with either a peristaltic or a submersible pump Because of the potential for further environmental contamination planning for purge water disposal is a necessary part of well monitoring Alternatives range from dumping it on the ground not back down the well to full containment treatment and disposal If the well is believed to be contaminated the best practice is to contain the purge water and store it until the water samples have been analyzed Once the contaminants are identified appropriate treatment requirements can be determined There are many methods available for well purging In some cases bailing will suffice however it can become tedious and labor intensive in deep or large diameter wells In some situations an inflatable packer can be utilized above and or below the pump to reduce the casing volume requiring purging This technique is particularly adaptable to wells with more than one screened interval to isolate the aquifer of interest The size and weigh
261. s This is usually accomplished by plugging pump inlet drawing a vacuum on the pump holding it for at least 1 minute and determining visually if leak allows bellows to inflate or piston fails to return completely into pump The pump can be plugged using a sealed detector tube Sources Section 4 2 6 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 Break open both ends of detector tube insert correct end into pump and sample according to instructions Most tubes have some kind of indicator i e arrow prefilter that helps determine which end of tube is the inlet The direction of the concentration scale is also a guide Visually inspect tube for color changes and record corresponding gas concentration Additional Notes Prior to use check tube expiration date because most have a defined shelf life Some tube manufacturers advise that tubes showing negative results can be reused before they are rendered useless The error potential and risk associated with reusing a previously opened tube is not advisable when working with hazardous materials Some types of detector tubes have reagent ampules which must be broken to activate the indicator Also some procedures call for use of multiple tubes in series for multiple parameter detection or specific interference removal The standard range of measurement or the detector sensitivity can sometimes be extended by changing the number of pump volumes pulled through the tube upper range
262. s adjusted to meet these criteria The recommended procedure involves precleaning a batch of Tenax by Soxhlet extraction in methanol first and then pentane for 24 hours each The sorbent is then oven dried packed in tubes and conditioned under carrier gas flow at 270 C resorption conditions for 4 hours The conditioning can be performed a final time 1 hour run just prior to use Cartridges are then stored in Teflon capped culture tubes packed in aluminum foil and then in 1 gallon paint cans for shipment to and from the field Culture tubes should be wrapped in foil to limit exposure of sampling cartridges to UV light Analysis should be instituted as quickly as possible in order to prevent sample 4 33 Section 4 2 7 Revision 0 Page 2 of 15 degradation Schlitt et al recommend a maximum storage time of 48 hours however this is often impractical and a maximum storage period of 30 days has been used successfully in a previous study In any event sorbent cartridges should be transported in solvent free coolers packed with blue ice and stored at 4 C while awaiting analysis The outlined procedure utilizes a borosilicate glass tube outside diameter 16 mm 5 8 by 10 cm in length The tube is packed with 1 2 grams of Tenax GC sorbent with a plug of glass wool at each end double plug at inlet The personal monitoring pumps can be any low flow model capable of maintaining consistent flows at the rates prescribed Personnel mon
263. s determine the water level in the well then calculate the fluid volume in the casing 2 Determine depth to midpoint of screen or well section open to aquifer consult drillers log 3 Lower displacement chamber until top is just below water level 4 Attach gas supply line to pressure adjustment valve on cap 5 Gradually increase gas pressure to maintain discharge flow rate Measure rate of discharge frequently bucket and stopwatch are usually sufficient 1 Purge a minimum of four casing volumes or until discharge characteristics stabilize see discussion on well purging in Section 3 4 Groundwater After pumping monitor water level recovery Recovery rate may be useful in determining sample rate Source U S Environmental Protection Agency Procedures Manual for Ground Water Monitoring at Solid Waste Disposal Facilities EPA 530 SW 611 August 1977 3 33 Section 3 4 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 QUICK HOSE COUPLER NEEDLE VALVE PRESSURE GAUGE DISCHARGE _ SAMPLE LINE FROM COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDER OR AIR PUMP TO WASTE SAMPLE BOTTLE PRESSURE LINE ya DISCHARGE SAMPLE CHECK VALVE SAMPLER BODY CHECK VALVE WELL CASING wwe s Source Reference 6 Figure 3 7 Gas pressure displacement system 3 34 Section 3 4 3 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 3 4 3 METHOD 111 9 SAMPLING MONITOR WELLS WITH A BUCKET BAILER Discussion Bucket type bail
264. s Chromatographic Mass Spectrometric Analysis with Selected lon Monitoring J Chromatogr 190 96 106 1980 Janek J J Ruzickova and J Novak Effect of Water Vapor in the Quantitation of Trace Components Concentrated by Frontal Gas Chromatography on Tenax GC J Chromatogr 99 689 696 1974 Russel Analysis of Air Pollutants Using Sampling Tubes and Gas Chromatography Environ Sci Technol 9 1175 1975 Biddleman T F Interlaboratory Analysis of High Molecular Weight Organochlorines in Ambient Air Atmos Environ 15 619 624 1980 Lewis R G R Brown and M D Jackson Evaluations of Polyurethane Foam for Sampling of Pesticides Polychlorinated Biphenyls and Polychlorinated Naphthalenes in Ambient Air Anal Chem 49 1668 1672 1977 26 27 31 34 Section 4 5 Revision 0 Page 3 of 4 Lewis R G and E McLeod Portable Sampler for Pesticides and Semivolatile Industrial Organic Chemicals in Air Anal Chem 54 310 315 1982 Billings W N and T F Biddleman Field Comparison of Polyurethane Foam and Tenax GC Resin for High Volume Air Sampling of Chlorinated Hydrocarbons Environ Sci and Techn 14 679 683 1980 Grover R and L A Kerr Evaluation of Polyurethane Foam as a Trapping Medium for Herbicide Vapor in Air Monitoring and Worker Inhalation Studies J Environ Sci Health 816 59 66 1981 Lindgren J L H J Krauss and A Fox A Comparison of Two Techniques for the
265. s explosive 4 13 17 18 Sources Section 4 2 3 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 As with any field instrument accurate results depend on the operator being completely familiar with the operator s manual for the particular unit Concentrations beyond the greatest scale factor of the instrument or in excess of 30 percent 0 3 LEL of the sample component require system modification Similar modification may be necessary for sampling in oxygen deficient atmospheres This usually entails increasing the combustion air to the detector by sample dilution or by an independent air supply A dilution system is simply the apparatus required to supply a filtered controlled air supply for analyzers that use the sample gas stream as the source of combustion air A dilution system can by selection of various critical orifices dilute a gas stream by ratios up to 100 1 Always be sure that carrier gas flow usually sample gas is initiated prior to lighting the detector flame Analabs Unit of Foxboro Analytical Operating and Service Manual for Century Systems Portable Organic Vapor Analyzer OVA Model OVA 108 and Optional Accessories Revision C North Haven Connecticut Section 4 2 4 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 4 2 4 METHOD 1 4 MONITORING TOXIC GASES AND VAPORS USING PHOTOIONI ZATION DETECTION Discussion This method is designed to detect measure and record real time levels of many organic and inorganic vapors in air A photoi
266. safety of instrumentation and safety equipment required for conducting the sampling all need to be evaluated in relation to the selection of proper methods and procedures The above criteria were consulted during the selection of each of the methods listed in the following sections Obviously tradeoffs were necessary and therefore some methods may prove excellent for some situations and less satisfactory for others This factor must be considered by any field investigator before using the procedures outlined here Section 1 3 Revision 1 Page 1 of 1 1 3 PURPOSE AND OBJECTIVE OF SAMPLING The basic objective of any sampling compaign is to collect a sample which is representative of the media under investigation More specifically the purpose of sampling at hazardous waste sites is to acquire information that will aid investigators in determining the presence and identity of onsite contaminants and the extent to which these compounds have become integrated into the surrounding environment This information can then be used as Support for future litigations or as input to remedial investigations and risk assessments The term sample has already been defined as a representative part of the media under investigation Representativeness however is a relative term and must be carefully considered along with several other criteria prior to the acquisition of samples A list of the criteria is as follows Representativeness This sam
267. sample vials in an appropriate carrying container maintained at 4 C throughout the sampling and transportation period Analyze samples within 14 days Quality Control Standard quality assurance practices should be used with this method Field replicates should be collected to validate the precision of the sampling techni ques Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organics particularly methylene chloride through the septum seal into the sample during shipment and storage A field blank prepared from organic free water and carried through the sampling and handling protocol can serve as a check on such contamination Field Blank The field blank is defined as an appropriate volume of organic free water which has been sent to the sampling site and back to the analytical laboratory in a container and bottle identical to the type used to collect the samples Field blanks and samples must be shipped in separate containers When received in the lab the field blank is analyzed as if it were an actual sample 30 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 31 of 52 Method 625 Extractables Base Neutrals Acids and Pesticides Apparatus and Materials Sampling equipment for discrete or composite sampling Grab sample bottle Amber glass 1 liter to 1 gallon volume French or Boston Round design is recommended The container must be washed and solvent rinsed before use to minimize interferences Bottle caps Threade
268. sed Sodium thiosulfate ACS 10 percent solution When sampling water containing residual chlorine sodium thiosulfate should be added to the clean sample bottle before sterilization in an amount sufficient to provide an approximate concentration of 100 mg l in the sample This can be accomplished by adding to a 500 ml bottle 0 4 ml of a 10 percent solution of sodium thiosulfate this will neutralize a sample containing about 15 mg l of residual chlorine The bottle is then stoppered capped and sterilized Water samples high in copper or zinc and wastewater samples high in heavy metals should be collected in sample bottles containing a chelating agent that will reduce metal toxicity This is particularly significant when such samples are in transit for 24 hours or more Ethyl enediaminetetraacetic acid EDTA is a satisfactory chelating agent A concentration of 372 mg l should be A 4 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 5 of 52 added separately to the sample bottle before sterilization 0 3 ml of a 15 percent solution in a 500 bottle or it may be combined with the sodium thiosulfate solution before addition Sample Collection Preservation and Handling When the sample is collected leave ample air space in the bottle at least 2 5 cm or 1 in to facilitate mixing of the sample by shaking preparatory to examination Care must be exercised to take samples that will be representative of the water being tested and to avoid contaminat
269. sitively charged ions when combusted in a hydrogen flame The magnitude of the response is a function of the detector sensitivity and the ionization properties of the particular compound as well as its concentration As a result this signal must be compared to that generated by calibration with a known concentration of a standard output of the detector is generally recorded on a strip chart recorder as intensity versus retention time producing a GC peak The area under the peak using an integrator or the peak height at maximum intensity can be used for quantitation Maximum sensitivity is generally in the mg m ppm range Photo lonization Detector PID The PID also ionizes sample introduced into it and responds to positive ions produced by an ultraviolet light source Again the magnitude of response is dependent on concentration and ionization properties of the compound Response is measured as with the FID The PID offers two advantages over the FID First it is sensitive to some compounds to the pg m ppb range especially light aromatics such as benzene toluene and xylene Secondly at least one model the HNu Model 301 Portable GC can be equipped with lamps of differing ionization potential providing some degree of selectivity Compounds with ionization potentials above that of the energy of the lamp being used exhibit vastly reduced response as compared to compounds with lower ionization potential For instance t
270. sonnel may contact contaminants on the clothing and or inhale them To prevent such occurrences methods to reduce contamination and decontamination procedures must be developed and implemented before anyone enters a site and must continue modified when necessary throughout site operations Decontamination consists of physically removing contaminants and or changing their chemical nature to innocuous substances How extensive decontamination must be depends on a number of factors the most important being the type of contaminants involved The more harmful the contaminant the more extensive and thorough decontamination must be Less harmful contaminants may require less decontamination Combining decontamination the correct method of doffing personnel protective equipment and the use of site work zones minimizes cross contamination from protective clothing to wearer equipment to personnel and one area to another Only general guidance can be given on methods and techniques for decontamination The exact procedure to use must be determined after evaluating a number of factors specific to the incident In addition the decontamination procedures for sample equipment should be developed in conjunction with the analytical lab s PRELIMINARY CONCERNS Initial Planning The initial decontamination plan assumes all personnel and equipment leaving the Exclusion Zone area of potential contamination are grossly contaminated A systemis then set up to w
271. sponse is proportional to the calibration gas concentration 4 If so equipped set alarm at desired level 5 Once calibrated unit is ready for use Position intake assembly in close proximity to area in question as the low sampling rate allows for only very localized readings 1 A slow sweeping motion of intake assembly will help prevent the by passing of problem areas prepared to evacuate the area if preset alarm sounds Operators utilizing supplied air systems may not need to consider this action Static voltage sources such as AC power lines radio transmissions or transformers may interfere with measurements See operating manual for discussion of necessary considerations 10 Regular cleaning and maintenance of instrument and accessories will assure representative readings 11 As with any field instrument accurate results depend on the operator being completely familiar with the operator s manual for the unit in use Sources HNU Systems Inc instruction Manual for Model PI 101 Photoionization Analyzer 1975 4 16 Section 4 2 5 Revision 0 page 1 of 14 4 2 5 METHOD 1V 5 USE OF PORTABLE FIELD OPERABLE GAS CHROMATOGRAPHS Discussion The use of field portable gas chromatography GC for obtaining data on concentrations of certain volatile organic compounds in ambient air in and around waste sites has been demonstrated While their ability to provide unambiguous identification and quantitation of tar
272. st method of cleaning is to bake it in the oven at 105 C overnight It may be possible to clean the syringe by removing the plunger inserting the needle into the injection port and allowing carrier gas to flow through it for several minutes Some instruments are equipped with a gas sampling loop to facilitate sample collection and injection This device is essentially a length of steel tubing with a known volume that is fitted to the head of the chromatographic column with a two way valve With the valve in the load position sample gas can be drawn through the loop with a pump then when the valve is switched to the inject position the loop is isolated from the pump system and the carrier gas is diverted into the loop to sweep its contents onto the column The sample loop improves the consistency of the injections by assuring a constant volume provided temperature and pressure are constant and a consistent injection speed 3 Operation Check battery charger level indicator if in doubt recharge battery as described in the manual b Turn instrument on and allow adequate warmup time Follow operating procedures for lighting FID flame if used lighting PID lamp if used establishing carrier gas flow zeroing recorder response etc d Using the procedure described below inject an appropriate amount of the standard described in Section 1 Hold the syringe in two hands using one to guide the needle into the septum and the
273. st commercially available Kemmerer bottles are of brass or plastic construction Modification of existing systems with nonreactive materials such as Teflon glass or stainless steel would be only partially successful due to the complicated machining necessary for the release mechanism Other modifications such as a stoppered bottom drain are simpler and useful in minimizing sample disturbance during transfer to the appropriate containers Uses The Kemmerer bottle is currently the most practical method of collecting discrete at depth samples from surface waters or vessels where the collection depth exceeds the lift capacity of pumps The application is limited however by the incomparability of various construction materials with some analytical techniques Proper selection i e all metal assemblies for organic analysis or all plastic assemblies for trace element analysis will overcome this deficiency Procedures for Use 1 Inspect Kemmerer bottle for thorough cleaning and insure that sample drain valve is closed if bottle is so equipped 2 Measure and then mark sample line at desired sampling depth 5 Open bottle by lifting top stopper trip head assembly 4 Gradually lower bottle until desired level is reached predesignated mark from Step 2 5 Place messenger on sample line and release Retrieve sampler hold sampler by center stem to prevent accidental opening of bottom stopper 7 Rinse wipe off exterior of sam
274. stody checks the sample tag information against the custody record He also checks sample condition and notes anything unusual under Remarks on the custody form D 6 Appendix D Revision 0 Page 7 of 11 N 1000 CLE C o PRESERVATIVE awauyses LLTLCN umans CENE TEMPERATURE CONTRACT NO DESIGNATE Figure 0 1 Sample Collection Tag D 7 Recewed by Signature Retinquished by Segnature Appendix D Revision 0 Page 8 of 11 1000 Chain of Custody Form Figure D e The the e The and e The Appendix D Revision 0 Page 9 of 11 originator signs in the topleft Relinquished by box and keeps copy person receiving custody signs in the adjacent Received by box keeps the original Date Time will be the same for both signatures since custody must be transferred to another person e Wien custody is transferred to the Sample Bank or an analytical laboratory blank signature spaces may be left and the last Received by signature box used Another approach is to run a line through the unused signature boxes In all cases it must be readily seen that the same person receiving custody has relinquished it to the next custodian e samples left unattended or a person refuses to sign this must be documented and explained on the custody record Receipt
275. t is being sampled 3 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 4 of 52 Bacteria Apparatus and Materials Polypropylene or glass bottles Samples for bacteriological examination must be collected in bottles that have been cleansed and rinsed with great care given a final rinse with distilled water and sterilized Bottles of glass capable of being sterilized and of any suitable size and shape may be used for samples intended for bacteriologic examination Bottles shall hold a sufficient volume of sample for all the required tests permit proper washing and maintain the samples uncontaminated until the examinations are completed Ground glass stoppered bottles preferably wide mouth and of break resistant glass are recommended Polypropylene bottles of Suitable size wide mouth and capable of being sterilized are also Satisfactory Metal or plastic screw cap closures may be used on sample bottles provided that no volatile compounds are produced on sterilization and that they are equipped with liners that do not produce toxic or bacteriostatic compounds on sterilization Before sterilization cover the tops and necks of sample bottles having glass closures with metal foil rubberized cloth heavy impermeable paper or milk bottle cover caps Glassware shall be sterilized for not less than 60 minutes at a temperature of 170 C For plastic bottles that distort on autoclaving low temperature ethylene oxide gas sterilization should be u
276. t of a pump and packer assembly usually require tripods derricks and hoist equipment which are not easily implemented Additionally the packer may be constructed of rubber material which may effect some analysis although viton packers are feasible Gas pressure lift systems are useful in many instances They are usually light easy to install and can be powered by several different pressure systems usually compressed nitrogen or air The effect of the contact between the pressure gas and the groundwater usually results in changes in the dissolved gas content As a result pH conductivity or other analysis used to determine purge completion must be conducted down hole Peristaltic pumps are widely used for purging of wells with water levels close to the surface less than 8 meters They are reasonably portable light and easily adaptable to ground level monitoring of purge indicator parameters by attaching a flow through cell These pumps require a minimum of down hole equipment and can easily be cleaned in the field or the entire tubing assembly can be changed for each well Several manufacturers are marketing submersible pumps specifically designed for groundwater monitoring They are generally capable of fitting down 2 inch 10 wells Most of these pumps have effective depth limitations of less than 150 feet Although some can operate to depths in excess of 300 ft they usually have substantially reduced discharge flows and significant power
277. t of the bottom of the tube as it is raised from the drum thereby reducing the representativeness of collected material Many 3 17 Section 3 3 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 3 3 1 METHOD 111 5 COLLECTION OF LIQUID CONTAINERIZED WASTES USING GLASS TUBES Description Liquid samples from opened containers 55 gallon drums are collected using lengths of glass tubing The glass tubes are normally 122 cm in length and 6 to 16 mm inside diameter Larger diameter tubes may be used for more viscous fluids if sampling with the small diameter tube is not adequate The tubing is broken up and discarded in the container after the sample has been collected eliminating difficult cleanup and disposal problems This method should not be attempted with less than a two man sampling team Uses This method provides for a quick relatively inexpensive means of collecting concentrated containerized wastes The major disadvantage is from potential sample loss which is especially prevalent when sampling less viscous fluids Splashing can also be a problem and proper protective clothing e g butyl rubber apron face shields boot covers should always be worn Procedures for Use 1 Remove cover from sample container opening 2 Insert glass tubing slowly to almost the bottom of the container Try to keep at least 30 cm of tubing above the top of the container 3 Allow the waste in the drum to reach its natural level in the tube 4 Cap the top of the tube
278. t only a health and safety concern but also an analytical and sampling consideration The Sampling Plan will detail proper decontamination procedures to safeguard both the onsite personnel and the sample integrity Appendix E provides generalized decontamination guidelines exerpted from Interim Standard Operating Safety Guides September 1982 Office of Emergency and Remedial Response Section 1 6 Revision 1 Page 1 of 3 1 6 IMPLEMENTATION OF SAMPLING PLAN It is the responsibility of the Field Team Leader to implement and obtain the goals of the Sampling Plan This involves overseeing and coordinating five primary tasks Management of the sampling team s Coordination with the analytical lab s Coordination with additional subcontractor efforts Implementation of the Safety Plan or Coordination with the Safety Officer and Implementation of the QA QC Plan or Coordination with the Quality Assurance Officer Small scale efforts often utilize the Field Team Leader FTL as the Safety Officer and the Quality Assurance Officer As the Sampling Plan increases in complexity it becomes essential that the FTL designate Safety and Quality Assurance Officers in order to insure proper implementation It then becomes the task of the FTL to coordinate their activities Each of the five primary tasks are described below Management of the Sampling Team The key task here is to insure that the goals of the sampling plan are ob
279. t path The CRC boundaries should be conspicuously marked with entry and exit restricted The far end is the hotline the boundary between the Exclusion Zone and the Contamination Reduction Zone Personnel exiting the Exclusion Zone must go through the CRC Anyone in the CRC should be wearing the Leve of Protection designated for the decontamination crew Another corridor may be required for the entrance and exit of heavy equipment needing decontamination Within the CRC distinct areas are set aside for decontamination of personnel portable field equipment removed clothing etc All activities within the corridor are confined to decontamination 4 Appendix Revision 0 Page 5 of 11 Personnel protective clothing respirators monitoring equipment sampling supplies etc are all maintained outside of the CRC Personnel don their protective equipment away from the CRC and enter the Exclusion Zone through a separate access control point at the hotline EXTENT OF DECONTAMINATION REQUIRED Modifications of Initial Plan The original decontamination plan must be adapted to specific conditions found at incidents These conditions may require more or less personnel decontamination than planned depending on a number of factors Type of Contami nant The extent of personnel decontamination depends on the effects the contaminants have on the body Contaminants do not all exhibit the same degree of toxicity or other hazard The more toxic
280. tained In addition to the selection and proper implementation of methods the FTL must continually adjust and carefully document changes to the sampling plan to accommodate situations which may arise This may involve for example relocating or adding sampling locations if the investigation uncovers new sources or should adverse weather make some locations inaccessible Thorough and detailed documentation of all onsite activities is also a critical responsibility This includes records of all expenditures manpower and equipment uses and any changes of scope These records are particularly important for Superfund investigation or any investigation where attempts wil be made to recover costs from responsible parties This aspect of the FTL s responsibilities is often overlooked or downplayed but to do so is likely to later result in tremendous problems in cost recovery Coordination with the Analytical Lab The sampling plan also serves to integrate the responsibilities of Sampling Teams and the analytical labs It is critical that the sampling activities are coordinated with the laboratory The following points illustrate the extent of this coordination and its importance to the project 1 14 Section 1 6 Revision 1 Page 2 of 3 Sampling schedules must be arranged with the laboratory manager to insure that the samples can be processed within the specified holding times Labels and labeling information should be discussed This wil
281. tal detector to varify absence of drums and pipes 2 Place bar point on ground and raise drive weight then allow weight to fall on bar It is only necessary to guide the weight in its vertical travel 3 Continue until desired depth or any penetration resistance is reached 4 Remove bar hole maker 5 Attach suitable length of Teflon tubing stainless steel or brass may be used in some instances but may result in some gas adsorption absorption to monitor instrument gas inlet 6 Lower tubing into test hole and operate monitor or gas sampling device as listed in Methods IV 1 through IV 8 7 Record results Remove sample tubing and observe that instrument readings return to background If not change tubing before proceeding to next test location 9 Tramp over and recover test hole Sources Flower F B Case History of Landfill Gas Movement Through Soils Rutgers University New Brunswick New Jersey 4 62 Section 4 3 1 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 DRIVE WEIGHT 60 cm oe BAR 2 OD x 1 Figure 4 7 4 63 Section 4 3 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 4 3 2 METHOD IV 11 MONITORING GAS AND VAPORS FROM WELLS Discussion The sampling of wells for gases and vapors can be accomplished by lowering an intake probe through a sealed cap on the top of the well Figure 4 8 The intake probe should be of nonsparking material that will further minimize adsorption or resorption
282. tance the description on the shipping paper for an empty packaging containing the residue of a hazardous material may include the word s EMPTY or EMPTY Last Contained Name of Substance as appropriate in association with the basic description of the hazardous material last contained in the packaging 2 For empty tank cars see Sec 174 25 c If a packaging a tank car contains a residue that is a hazardous substance the description on the shipping paper shall be prefaced with the phrase EMPTY Last Contained Name of Substance and shall have RQ entered before or after the basic description Dangerous When Wet The words Dangerous When Wet shall be entered on the shipping paper in association with the basic description when a package covered by the basic description is required to be labeled with a DANGEROUS WHEN WET abel Poisonous Materials Notwithstanding the class to which a material is assigned 1 If the name of the compound or Meu constituent that causes the material to meet the definition of a poison is not included in the proper shipping name for the AMA the name of that compound or constituent shall be entered on the shipping paper in association with the shipping description for the material 2 The name of the compound or principal constituent may be either a technical name or any name for the material that is listed in the NIOSH ELA Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances 1978 Edition
283. tate precautionary measures to be taken They can be used to screen pockets or depressions in 4 2 Section 4 2 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 the land contour areas in close proximity to drums or spills or closed in unventilated rooms which may not have enough oxygen to support life or which allow combustible vapors to concentrate Other instruments that may be required for evaluating the hazard potential of ambient or workplace atmospheres are those which utilize flame ionization FID and photoionization PID detectors These detectors are important due to the increased levels of sensitivity they can provide for specific compound classes and when used in conjunction with chromatographic columns can specifically characterize and or identify hazardous materials at spills or dump sites The Century OVA and AID Model 550 represent a type of instrument which uses a flame ionization detector In its simplest form this type is used to determine the presence of gaseous and or vapor phase hydrocarbons These instruments responded to most gaseous vapor phase organics present The readings are referenced to a single component standard gas usually methane The response of such instruments is often termed total hydrocarbons however this is misleading since not all hydrocarbons are detected specifically important particulate hydrocarbons i e pesticides and polynuclear aromatics and polychlorinated biphenyls In addition the response to mixtur
284. te should be secured in plastic bags before being removed from the site E 10 Appendix E Revision 0 Page 11 of 11 Contaminated wash and rinse solutions should be contained by using step in containers for example child s wading pool to hold spent solutions Another containment method is to dig a trench about 4 inches deep and line it with plastic In both cases the spent solutions are transferred to drums which are labeled and disposed of with other substances onsite Appendix F Revision 0 Page 1 of 7 APPENDIX F INSTRUMENT CERTIFICATION Source Hazardous Materials Incident Response Operations Training Course Manual 165 1 F 1 Appendix F Revision 0 Page 2 of 7 INHERENT SAFETY The portable instrumentation used to evaluate hazardous material spills or waste sites must be demonstrated as being safe to use in those hostile environments Electrical devices such as the monitoring instruments must be constructed in such a fashion as to eliminate the possibility of igniting a combustible atmosphere The sources of this ignition could be an arc generated by the power source itself or the associated electronics and or a flame or heat source inherent in the instrument and necessary for its proper functioning Several engineering insurance and safety industries have standardized test methods established inclusive definitions and developed codes for testing electrical devices used in hazardous locations The National Fire
285. tegrity of the collection system can now be maintained with only the most nonreactive material contacting the sample Some loss in lift ability will result since the pump is now moving air a compressible gas rather than an essentially noncompressible liquid It may on occasion be necessary to sample large bodies of water where a near surface sample will not sufficiently characterize the body as a whole In this instance again the above mentioned pump is quite serviceable It is capable of lifting water from depths in excess of 6 meters Since the lift capacity is actually measured as the distance above the hydrostatic surface it is possible to withdraw samples from depths significantly below the water surface It should be noted that this lift ability decreases somewhat with higher density fluids and with increased wear on the silicone pump tubing 3 3 Section 3 2 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Similarly increases in altitude will decrease the pumps ability to lift from depth When sampling a liquid stream which exhibits a considerable flow rate it may be necessary to weight the bottom of the suction line The stainless steel strainer suction weight supplied with the ISCO and Manning samplers usually works well A heavier weight can be constructed by filling a short 7 5 cm to 10 cm length of Teflon tubing with lead and plugging both ends with tight fitting Teflon plugs This weight can then be clamped with stainless steel band clamps to the suction
286. ten used to verify the reproducibility of the data Split Samples Split samples are duplicate samples given to the owner operator or person in charge for separate independent analysis Spiked Samples Spiked samples are duplicate samples that have a known amount of a substance of interest added to them These samples are used to corroborate the accuracy of the analytical technique and could be used as an indicator of sample quality change during shipment to the laboratory Document Control Chai n of Custody Strict adherence to document and data control procedures is essential from the standpoint of good quality assurance quality control and should be insti tuted as routine in any hazardous waste investigation It becomes important when collected data is used to support enforcement litigations A l 12 Section 1 5 Revision 1 Page 5 of 5 collected information data calibration and maintenance records samples and documents must therefore be accounted for and retrievable at any time during an investigation The purpose of document control is to ensure that all project documents be accounted for when the project is complete Types of documents considered essential include maps drawings photographs project work plans quality assurance plans serialized logbooks data sheets coding forms confidential information reports etc Chain of custody procedures are necessary to document the sample identity handl
287. therefore be cleared with the project officer or other disposal techniques evaluated In many instances a drum containing waste material will have a sludge layer on the bottom Method 111 5 Slow insertion of the sample tube down into this layer and then a gradual withdrawal will allow the sludge to act as a bottom plug to maintain the fluid in the tube The plug can be gently removed and placed into the sample container by the use of a stainless steel lab spoon These spoons are relatively inexpensive and can be disposed of in the original waste container with the glass transfer tube Designs exist for equipment that will collect a sample from the ful depth of a drum and maintain it in the transfer tube until delivery to the sample bottle These designs include primarily the Composite Liquid Waste Sampler COLIWASA and modifications thereof The COLIWASA is difficult to properly decontaminate in the field its applicability is therefore limited to those cases when a sample of the full depth of the drum is absolutely necessary The COLIWASA can be somewhat modified for this task by making the lift rod of stainless steel the bottom stopper of Teflon and the body of glass tubing In this configuration the glass tube can be broken into the drum leaving only the center rod and the stopper to be decontaminated In a preliminary investigation where the total number of drums to be sampled is small an equal number of both the center rods and bottom stopp
288. thion Carbamate pesticides Propoxur Catbofuran Bendi ocarb Mexacarbate Car bar yl Urea pesticides Monuron Di uron Li nuron Terbuthi uron Fl uometuron Chl orotoluron Triazine pesticides Si mazi ne Atrazine Propazine 25 32 25 32 Ethyl parathion Parathion Mal at hi continued 4 50 TABLE 4 8 continued Pyrethrin pesticides Pyrethrin Pyrethrin 11 Allethrin d Trans allethrin Dicrotophos Resmethrin Fenvalerate 34 28 36 30 29 Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons Naphthalene Bi phenyl Fl uorene Di benzothiophene Phenanthrene Anthracene Carbazole 2 Methyl anthracene 1 Methyl phenanthrene Fluoranthene Pyrene Benzo a fluorene Benzo b fluorene Section 4 2 8 Revision 0 Page 4 of 7 Benzo a anthracene Chrysene triphenylene Benzo b fluoranthene Benzo e pyrene Benzo a pyrene Perylene Phenyl enepyrene Dibenzo at ah anthracene Benzo g h i perylene Coronene Section 4 2 8 Revision 0 Page 5 of 7 at 20 C nor are they applicable for differentiating between vapor phase organics and those adsorbed on particulate matter When collection of such compounds is desired it will be necessary to utilize separate collection media Tenax GC filters etc or combination cartridges Although sampling trains consisting of a particulate pre filter followed by a backup sorbent cartridge have been described indications are that large portions of the
289. tion Although several sorbents or sorbent combinations have been utilized for collection and concentration of volatile organic species at present the porous polymer Tenax GC is the most widely studied for a wide variety of compounds at concentrations typically found in ambient air 6 is hydrophobic thermally stable up to 360 C and permits thermal resorption of organic species with volatility greater than n eicosane at temperatures of 280 C Glass or glass lined stainless steel sampling cartrides of various sizes and configurations are available and can be purchased prepacked or packed to specifications in the laboratory In any case the sorbent and or prepacked tubes must be thoroughly precleaned conditioned and checked for freedom from interferences prior to use Other sorbents or combination of sorbents may be applied with equal success depending upon the nature of the ambient environment and the specific species of volatiles under investigation Monsanto Research Corporation reports success with a combination sorbent system based on Tenax GC Porapak R and Ambersorb XE 340 which has been used to collect a broad range of organic compounds NIOSH procedures may also be used and the NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods should be consulted where applicable Finally if the detection of specific organics is desired the characteristics of the compound and sorbent of interest should be researched and all sampling parameter
290. tion as indicated in 3A end C above 1 Abbreviations may be used to specify the type of packaging weight or volume Example 40 Cyl Nitrogen Nonflammable gas UN 1066 800 pounds 1 box Cement liquid n o s Flammable liquid NAI133 25 165 2 Type of packaging and destination marks may be entered in any appropriate manner before or after the basic description G Technical and chemical group names may be entered in parentheses between the shipping name and hazard class Example Corrosive liquid m o s capryrl ch corrosive material 4 GENERAL ENTRIES ON SHIPPING PAPERS Sec 172 201 A CONTENTS When a hazardous material on the shipping paper s that description must conform to the following requirements 1 When a hazardous material including not subject to the fae is described on the same shipping paper the hazardous material description entries required ae Sec 172 202 and those additional entries that may be required by Sec 172 2 Must entered first See Figure 1 or b Must be entered in a contrasting color except that a description on a repro duction of a shipping paper may be M rather than printed in a contrasting color these ts y only to the basic description required by Sec 172 202 1 2 and 3 See Figure 1 or Must be identified by the entry X acid before the proper shipping name in a column captioned the X may be replaced by RQ Reportabl
291. tion collect on the rod The main disadvantage of the pocket chamber is that the collecting rod charging procedure and the determination of exposure must be accomplished externally on unit called a The main advantages of pocket chambers in comparison to the direct reading dosimeter are the low cost and simplicity 5 4 Section 5 3 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 5 3 SURVEY INSTRUMENTS Radiation survey instruments must meet the same criteria as previously outlined for other monitors used at hazardous waste sites They should be portable rugged sensitive simple in design and operation reliable and intrinsically safe for use in explosive atmospheres No one survey instrument or type of instrument can be expected to totally meet all of these criteria and the investigator must be aware of the characteristics and limitations of each type of detector It is of primary concern that the proper instruments are chosen for the particular survey requirements Radiation survey instruments are designed to detect only certain types of radiation and only operate within certain exposure rate ranges In most cases more than one kind of instrument will be needed to insure that an area is free of radioactive sources or contamination An instrument sensitive to background levels of gamma radiation should be the first one used Scintillation detectors meet this requirement Geiger Mueller detectors also meet this need and have
292. topper hits the bottom of the waste container push the sampler tube downward against the stopper to close the sampler Lock the sampler in the closed position by turning the T handle until it is upright and one end rests tightly on the locking block Slowly withdraw the sampler from the waste container with one hand while wiping the sampler tube with a disposable cloth or rag with the other hand Carefully discharge the sample into a suitable sample container by slow y pulling the lower end of the T handle away from the locking block while the lower end of the sampler is positioned in a sample contai ner Cap the sample container with a Teflon lined cap attach label and seal record in field logbook and complete sample analysis request sheet and chain of custody record Unscrew the T handle of the sampler and disengage the locking block Clean sampler onsite or store the contaminated parts of the sampler in a plastic storage tube for subsequent cleaning Store used rags in plastic bags for subsequent disposal See Appendix E for general decontamination procedures deVera E R Simmons B P Stephens R D and Storm D L Samplers and Sampling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams EPA 600 2 80 019 January 1980 Section 3 3 2 Page 2 of 3 Revision 0 BSBAT1 OD 1ejdues 93150duo g 21 0 aaysen pug NOILISOd 0350719 INU 4501 JM 48 t WO 6 0
293. ttle that would otherwise result from direct immersion in the liquid Use of this device also prevents the technician from having to physically contact the waste stream Depending upon the sampling application the transfer vessel can either disposed of or reused If reused the vessel should be thorougly rinsed and or decontaminated prior to sampling a different source Uses A transfer device can be utilized in most sampling situations except where aeration must be eliminated samples for volatile organic analysis or where Significant material may be lost due to adhesion to the transfer container Procedures for Use 1 Submerge a precleaned stainless steel dipper or other suitable device with minimal surface disturbance 2 Allow the device to fill slowly and continuously 3 Retrieve the dipper device from the surface water with minimal disturbance 4 Remove the cap from the sample bottle and slightly tilt the mouth of the bottle below the dipper device edge 5 Empty the dipper device slowly allowing the sample stream to flow gently down the side of the bottle with minimal entry turbulence 6 Continue delivery of the sample until the bottle is almost completely filled Leave adequate ullage to allow for expansion 1 Select appropriate bottles and preserve the sample if necessary as per guidelines in Appendix A Check that a Teflon liner is present in the cap if required Secure the cap tightly 9 Label the sampl
294. tubing in the pump head as per the manufacturer s instructions Allow sufficient tubing on discharge side to facilitate convenient dispensation of liquid into sample bottles and only enough on the suction end for attachment to the intake line This practice will minimize sample contact with the silicone pump tubing 2 Select the length of suction intake tubing necessary to reach the required sample depth and attach to intake side of pump tubing Heavy wall Teflon of a diameter equal to the required pump tubing suits most applications Heavier wall will allow for a slightly greater lateral reach 3 If possible allow several liters of sample to pass through system before actual sample collection Collect this purge volume and then return to source after the sample aliquot has been withdrawn 4 Fill necessary sample bottles by allowing pump discharge to flow gently down the side of bottle with minimal entry turbulence Cap each bottle as filled 5 Select appropriate bottles and preserve the sample if necessary as per guidelines in Appendix A 6 Check that a Teflon liner is present in the cap if required Secure the cap tightly 3 10 Section 3 2 3 Page 2 of 4 Revision 0 Sur dues 10 dund 2 6 Z 232Jnog YINIVLNOD 3 ldMVS OL 39UvH2S Q SNIGNL NO1431 30 SH19N3 034 0 SNIGNL 3 021715 3Q0VH9 1v2IQ3WN dWNd 311 1V4SId3d 3
295. ty to advise on matters involving decontamination 7 Appendix E Revision 0 Page 8 of 11 Physical Injury Physical injuries can range from a sprained ankle to a compound fracture from a minor cut to massive bleeding Depending on the seriousness of the injury treatment may be given at the site by trained response personnel For more serious injuries additional assistance may be required at the site or the victim may have to be treated at a medical facility Life saving care should be instituted immediately without considering decontamination The outside garments can be removed depending on the weather if they do not cause delays interfere with treatment or aggravate the problem Respiratory masks and backpack assemblies must always be removed Fully encapsulating suits or chemical resistant clothing can be cut away If the outer contaminated garments cannot be safely removed the individual should be wrapped in plastic rubber or blankets to help prevent contaminating the inside of ambulances and or medical personnel Outside garments are then removed at the medical facility No attempt should be made to wash or rinse the victim One exception would be if it is known that the individual has been contaminated with an extremely toxic or corrosive material which could also cause severe injury or loss of life For minor medical problems or injuries the normal decontamination procedure should be followed Heat Stress Heat relat
296. ty to area in question to get accurate reading If alarm occurs personnel should evacuate area unless equipped with supplied air equipment suitable for use in an IDLH atmosphere Some important factors to keep in mind during use are Slow sweeping motions may assist in the prevention of bypassing problem areas Operation of instrument in temperatures outside of manufacturer specified operating range may compromise accuracy of readings or damage unit The instrument should always be calibrated at the temperature of intended use Presence of known or unknown interfering gases especially oxidants can affect readings for example the Edmont Model 60 400 Oxygen Monitor has interferences of the following gases in concentrations greater than 0 25 percent or 2500 ppm 0 fluorine chlorine bromide iodines and nitrogen oxides See the operating manual for unit being used The oxygen detector can also be poisoned decrease in sensitivity by exposure to various gases Some detectors are poisoned by concentration of mercaptans and hydrogen sulfide greater than or equal to 1 percent See operating manual for unit being used Wien relying on alarm mode for warnings of oxygen deficient atmospheres a manual check of the alarm function at regular intervals is recommended Wherever applicable protect instrument with a disposable cover to prevent contamination Most units will have rechargeable battery packs that provide continuous operat
297. uce the gas through a dilution system with a known calibrated dilution factor Uses A portable FID is useful as a general screening tool to detect the presence of most organic vapors It will not however respond to particulate hydrocarbons such as pesticides PNAs and PCBs It can be used to detect pockets of gaseous hydrocarbons in depressions or confined spaces to screen drums or other containers for the presence of entrapped vapors or generally to assess an area for the presence of elevated levels of vapor phase organics Procedure for Use The procedures presented in this section are intended to apply to any portable FID therefore detailed operating instructions must be obtained from the operating manual of the specific unit to be used 4 12 10 14 15 Section 4 2 3 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 Check battery charge level indicator if in doubt recharge battery as described in manual Turn instrument on and allow adequate warmup time If equipped with internal calibration capability perform instrument calibration Perform zero and other calibration procedures as described in operating manual If equipped with an alarm mode set alarm at desired concentration Turn on pump and check for leaks by covering sample inlet and observing rotameter Indicator ball should drop to zero level With pump operating open hydrogen gas storage tank valve and open supply regulator to allow fuel gas flow to detector chamber D
298. vel in the well then calculate the fluid volume in the casing 2 Purge well as per Methods 111 7 or 111 8 3 Attach precleaned bailer to cable or line for lowering 4 Lower bailer slowly until it contacts water surface 5 Allow bailer to sink and fill with a minimum of surface disturbance Slowly raise bailer to surface Do not allow bailer line to contact ground Tip bailer to allow slow discharge from top to flow gently down the side of the sample bottle with minimum entry turbulence Repeat steps 2 5 as needed to acquire sufficient volume 9 Select sample bottles and preserve the sample if necessary according to the guidelines in Appendix A 3 35 STAINLESS WIRE CABLE 1 1 4 0 D x 1 0 TEFLON EXTRUDED TUBING 18 TO 36 LONG 3 4 DIAMETER GLASS OR TEFLON DIAMETER TEFLON EXTRUDED ROO 5 16 DIAMETER HOLE Figure 3 8 Teflon bailer 3 36 Section 3 4 3 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 Section 3 4 3 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 10 Check that a Teflon liner is present in cap if required Secure the cap tightly 11 Label the sample bottle with an appropriate tag Be sure to complete the tag with all necessary information Record the information in the field logbook and complete all chain of custody documents 12 Thoroughly decontaminate the bailer after each use according to specific laboratory instructions or the general guidelines in Appendix In some cases especially where trace analysis
299. vision 0 Page 36 of 52 Phenols Apparatus and Materials e Glass bottles 9 Concentrated Sulfuric Acid HoSO4 ACS Sample Collection Preservation and Handling e Acidify sample with concentrated HoSO4 acid to a pH of 2 0 or less e Oxidizing agents such as chlorine should be removed immediately after sampling by the addition of an excess of ferrous ammonium sulfate e Store samples at 4 C e All samples should be analyzed within 28 days of collection Quality Control Phenols concentrations usually encountered in wastewaters are Subject to biological and chemical oxidation It is recommended that preserved and stored samples be analyzed as soon as possible Appendix A Revision 0 Page 37 of 52 Orthophosphate Apparatus and Materials e Polyethylene or glass bottles Sample Collection Preservation and Handling e Store samples at 4 C All samples must be analyzed within 48 hours of collection Quality Control Do not store samples containing low concentrations of phosphorus in plastic bottles because phosphate may adsorbed onto the walls of the bottles Rinse all glass containers with hot dilute HCI then rinse several times in distilled water Never use commercial detergents containing phosphate for cleansing glassware used in phosphate analyses Appendix A Revision 0 Page 38 of 52 Phosphorus Total Apparatus and Materials Polyethyl ene or glass bottles conc sulfuri
300. w the trier making sure that the slot is facing Upward 4 Transfer the sample into a suitable container with the aid of a spatula and or brush LE If composite sampling is desired repeat the sampling at different points two or more times and combine the samples in the same sample container 2 19 Section 2 4 1 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 24 40 l 1 27 2 54 cm 5 1 Source Reference 4 Figure 2 5 Sampling trier 2 20 Section 2 4 1 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 6 Check that a Teflon liner is present in the cap if required Secure the cap tightly The chemical preservation of solids is generally not recommended Refrigeration is usually the best approach supplemented by a minimal holding time Consult Appendix A for sample containerization and preservation requirements 1 Label the sample bottle with the appropriate sample tag Be sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Complete all chain of custody documents and record in the field logbook Clean and decontaminate sampler after use and between sampling locations as per guidelines presented in Appendix Decontamination Sources deVera E R Simmons B P Stephens R D and Storm D L Samplers and Sampling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams EPA 600 2 80 018 January 1980 Section 2 4 2 Revision 0 Page 1 of 3 2 4 2 METHOD 11 8 SAMPLING BULK MATERIALS WITH A GRAIN THIEF Discussion
301. water 600 4 76 049 U S Dept of Commerce 1976 Everett L G D Schmidt R M Tinlin and D R Todd Monitoring Ground Water Quality Methods and Costs 600 4 76 023 U S Environmental Protection Agency Washington D C 1976 Hensley C P W J Keffer C McKenzie and M D Lair Continuous Monitoring Automated Analysis and Sampling Procedures Journal WPCE pp 1061 1065 1978 Hurst 6 5 and J E Turner Elementary Radiation Physics John Wiley and Sons New York 1967 Johnson M G The Stratified Sample Thief A Device for Sampling Unknown Fluids In National Conference on Management of Hazardous Waste Sites Washington D C 1981 Josephson J Safeguards for Groundwaters Environmental Science and Technology 14 1 38 44 1980 Lentzen D E D Wagoner E D Estes and W F Gutknecht IERL RTP Procedures Manual Level 1 Environmental Assessment second EPA 600 7 78 201 1978 MacLeod E and R Lewis Measurement of Contamination from PCB Sources In Sampling and Analysis of Toxic Organics in the Atmosphere ASTM STP 721 Philadelphia PA 1980 MacLeod E Polychlorinated Biphenyls in Indoor Air Environmental Science and Technology 7 11 1981 Maddalone R F Technical Manual for Inorganic Sampling and Analysis EPA 600 277 024 1977 Mason Benjamin J Protocol for Soil Sampling Techniques and Strategies EPA 600 54 83 002 U S Environmental Protection
302. when sampling for entrapped gases The container must be opened to accept a sample probe while still preventing uncontrolled release of its potentially hazardous contents Further this must be accomplished while still protecting the safety of the inspector On large vessels and tanks inspection valves and petcocks are normally available Sealed drums however are not designed to contain gases that often develop as reaction products of the contents and have no such provisions Leak free sample tops can be installed on these drums by attaching a mechanism that will drill through leak tight fitting strapped to the drum Figure 4 9 system consists of a battery operated drill with a remote control switch The drill 15 mounted on a simple spring controlled frame which guides the drill bit through a Swagelok cross fitting The Swagel ok cross is attached to a ball valve which in turn is attached to a mounting plate The mounting plate underside is gasketed with closed cell Neoprene foam The mounting plate is held against the container using standard steel packaging straps The cross fitting contains a Teflon seal which allows the drill bit to rotate without allowing gases from the container to escape during drum penetration A pressure gauge is attached to one side of the Swagel ok cross while a needle valve is attached to the side opposite the gauge The pressure gauge permits the waste handler to observe the internal pressure of the contain
303. with the regulations by printing manually or mechanically the following statement on the shipping paper containing the required description This is to certify that the above named materials are properly classified described packaged marked and labeled and are in Jis condition for transportation according to the applicable regulations of the Department of Transportation NOTE The works herein named may be substituted for the words above named NOTE For hazardous waste shipments the words and the must be added to the end of the certification See CFR Title 40 Sec 262 21 0 C 16 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 17 of 23 B TRANS EORTALLON enera ertification containing the following language may be used in place of the cer rtification required by paragraph A 1 above hereby certify that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described above by proper shipping name and are classified packed marked and labeled and in proper condition for carriage by air according to applicable national governmenta regulations 2 Duplicate Certificate Each person who offers a hazardous material to an aircraft operator for transportation by air shall provide two 2 copies of the certificate Sec 175 30 3 Passenger and Cargo Aircraft If hazardous materials are offered for transportation by air add to the the following statement This iswithin the limitations prescribed for passenger
304. x A Revison 0 Page 28 of 52 Organics Purgeables Method 624 Extractables Nethod 625 Pesticides PCBs Method 608 Appendix A Revision 0 Page 29 of 52 Method 624 Purgeables Apparatus and Materials e The water sample is to be collected in two 2 40 ml vials with Teflon faced silicone septa and screw caps and maintained at 4 C unti Bank the sampler s responsibility has been relieved at the Sample e Container Preparation 1 Wash 40 ml vials with screw caps Pierce 13075 or equivalent and Teflon faced silicone septa Pierce No 12722 or equivalent separately utilizing a solution of Alconox detergent or equivalent and hot tap water Rinse thoroughly with deionized water Place vials caps and septa on precleaned aluminum foil as described above and bake in an oven for one hour at 105 C Allow the vials to cool with the septa properly inserted and the caps screwed on loosely Tighten down caps when cool Store vials in an area not subject to contamination by air or other sources Sample Collection Preservation and Handling If the sample contains residual chlorine add sodium thiosulfate as a preservative 10 mg 40 ml is sufficient for up to 5 ppm Clo to the empty sample bottles just prior to shipping to the sampling site If aromatic compounds such as benzene toluene and ethylbenzene are to be determined one of the following procedures should be used to minimize degradation of these com
305. y does not relieve persons from comply ing with the Department of Transportation s Hazardous Materials Regulations Fina authority for use of shipping papers is found in the Code of Federal Regulation Title 49 Part 100 177 a JEN ion n ati CFR Title NOTE This material may be reproduced without special permission from this office Any comments or recommendations should be sent to the address below DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATI ON RESEARCH AND SPECIAL PROGRAMS ADMINISTRATION MATERIALS TRANSPORTATION BUREAU OFFICE OF OPERATIONS AND ENFORCEMENT INFORMATION SERVICES DIVISION 11 WASHINGTON D C 20590 REVISED MAY 1981 19 9 Appendix C Revision 0 Page 20 of 23 US Department of Fansponiation ATTACHMENT C 2 Research and GUIDE FOR MARKINGS The following information has been abstracted from the Code of Federal Regulations CFR Title 49 Transportation Parts 100 199 Refer to the appropriate Sections for details NOTE Rulemaking proposals are outstanding or are contemplated concerning the regulations Keep up to date with the changes MARKING means the application of the descriptive name proper shipping name hazard class identification number when authorized instructions cautions weight or a combination thereof on the outstde shipping container Marking also inciudes the specification mark for both the inside and outside shipping con tainers required by the Hazardous Materials Regulation
306. y so that lowering rate can be reduced thus preventing unnecessary bottom disturbance 3 Open sampler jaws until latched From this point on support sampler by its lift line or the sampler will be tripped and the jaws wil close 4 Tie free end of sample line to fixed support to prevent accidental loss of sampler 5 Begin lowering the sampler until the proximity mark is reached Slow rate of descent through last meter until contact is felt 7 Allow sample line to slack several centimeters In strong currents more slack may be necessary to release mechanism 2 15 Section 2 3 4 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 Figure 2 4 Ponar grab 2 16 Section 2 3 4 Revision 0 Page 3 of 3 Slowly raise dredge clear of water surface 9 Place Ponar into a stainless steel or Teflon tray and open Lift Ponar clear of the tray 10 Collect a suitable aliquot with a stainless steel lab spoon or equivalent and place sample into appropriate sample bottle Appendix A contains containerization and preservation requirements 11 Check for a Teflon liner in cap if required and secure cap tightly The chemical preservation of solids is generally not recommended Refrigeration is usually the best approach supplemented by a mini mal holding ti me 12 Label the sample bottle with the appropriate sample tag Be sure to label the tag carefully and clearly addressing all the categories or parameters Complete all chain of custody documents and rec
307. y the nature of the materials being sampled In general as sources vary over time and distance the representativeness of grab samples will decrease Composite Samples Composites are combinations of more than one sample collected at various sampling locations and or different points in time Analysis of composite yields an average value and can in certain instances be used as an alternative to analyzing a number of individual grab samples and calculating an average 1 6 Section 1 4 Revision 0 Page 2 of 3 jo 4 sung E a 21 o dues uey ie eus suoTsuadsngs E 23 po3e nueig 3201 peZI Ie31sK1i9 5 1 3 sing jo 53 59528 53 138 58528 3 11 4 sprnbrz eee saguey snonuyju09 sodugeu snooaueSoumoH P ae EAE T493 U 343 Jnoysnorzyy ay ynoysnoayy AqFTenb jo 3105 93912STd T T193 U y 3nouSnoiui __________________ aBueyo on ee Section 1 4 Revision 1 Page 3 of 3 value

Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites--A Methods

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents